445
0 SAP AG 2002 TSCM60 Order Fulfillment I - Part 2 SAP AG 2002 Click to edit Master title style FS310 Inkasso/Exkasso THE BEST-RUN E-BUSINESSES RUN SAP © SAP AG 2002 TSCM60 Order Fulfillment I Part 2 of 2 SAP R/3 4.6C 2002/Q3 Material Number: 5005 7289

TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    5

  • Download
    3

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

0

SAP AG 2002

TSCM60 Order Fulfillment I - Part 2

SAP AG 2002

Click to edit Master title styleFS310 Inkasso/Exkasso

THE BEST-RUN E-BUSINESSES RUN SAP

© SAP AG 2002

TSCM60Order Fulfillment I

Part 2 of 2

SAP R/3 4.6C2002/Q3 Material Number: 5005 7289

Page 2: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Copyright 2002 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted inany form or for any purpose without the express permission ofSAP AG. The information contained herein may be changedwithout prior notice.

All rights reserved.

Copyright

Trademarks: Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®, S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated.UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape.SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, ABAP, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Page 3: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2001

TSCM62

Order Fulfillment II

10 daysTSCM60

Order Fulfillment I

10 days TSCM64

Order Fulfillment III(Case Study)

5 daysApplication Consul-tant CertificationmySAP SCM - OrderFulfillment 2002

Solution Consultant mySAP SCM - OrderFulfillment

Page 4: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Participants Consultants responsible for implementing Order

Fulfillment with mySAP SCM.

Duration: 10 days

Target Audience

User notes

These training materials are not a teach-yourself program. They complement the explanations provided by your course instructor. Space is provided on each page for you to note down additional information.

There may not be sufficient time during the course to complete all the exercises. The exercises provide additional examples that are covered during the course. You can also work through these examples in your own time to increase your understanding of the topics.

Page 5: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Required:

Business knowledge in the area of sales anddistribution processing

Prerequisites

Page 6: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Course Goals

Course Objectives

Course Content

Course Overview Diagram

Main Business Scenario

Contents:

Course Overview

Page 7: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

This course will prepare you to:

Execute the main business processes in salesand distribution processing

Implement the main functions and Customizingsettings for sales processing

Course Goals

Page 8: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Course Content: TSCM60

Course Course Overview

Course SAP Overview

Course Processes in Sales and Distribution

Course Sales

Course Mini Case Study

Course Certification

This Consultant Training contains different courses each discussing a specific topic. Each single course is divided into different unit.

Page 9: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Course Content: SAP Overview

SAP AG 2002

Unit 1 mySAP.comUnit 2 Navigation

Workplace Release 2.11Date: February 2001Material number: 5004 3844

Page 10: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Unit 1 Enterprise Structures in Sales and DistributionUnit 2 Overview of Sales ProcessesUnit 3 Master Data in Sales and DistributionUnit 4 Sales From Stock - AvailableUnit 5 Sales From Stock - ShortageUnit 6 Make-To-OrderUnit 7 Returns and Credit Memo Processing

Unit 8 Reporting and Analysis on the Processes in Sales andDistribution

Course Content: Processes in SD

This Consultant Training contains different courses each discussing a specific topic. Each single course is divided into different units.

Page 11: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Course Content: Sales

Appendix

Unit 1 IntroductionUnit 2 Enterprise Structures

in SalesUnit 3 Sales Order ProcessingUnit 4 Sales Document TypeUnit 5 Item CategoryUnit 6 Schedule Line CategoryUnit 7 Data Flow

Unit 8 Special BusinessTransactions

Unit 9 IncompletenessUnit 10 Partner DeterminationUnit 11 Outline AgreementsUnit 12 Material

DeterminationUnit 13 Free Goods

Page 12: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Unit 1 Sales to EmployeesUnit 2 Bills of MaterialUnit 3 Material Determination

Course Content: Mini Case Study

Page 13: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Course: Sales

SAP AG SAP AG 2002

SAP R/3 4.6C2002/Q3 Material Number: 5005 7289

Page 14: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Course Overview

Course Goals

Course Objectives

Course Content

Course Overview Diagram

Main Business Scenario

Contents:

Page 15: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Course Objectives

At the conclusion of this course, you will be able to:

Integrate sales in the SD process chain

Configure Customizing so that it represents yourspecific sales requirements

Find and use Help within the system

Page 16: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Course Content: Sales

Appendix

Unit 1 IntroductionUnit 2 Enterprise Structures

in SalesUnit 3 Sales Order ProcessingUnit 4 Sales Document TypeUnit 5 Item CategoryUnit 6 Schedule Line CategoryUnit 7 Data Flow

Unit 8 Special BusinessTransactions

Unit 9 IncompletenessUnit 10 Partner DeterminationUnit 11 Outline AgreementsUnit 12 Material

DeterminationUnit 13 Free Goods

Page 17: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Course Overview Diagram

§§

0,-- ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special Business Transactions

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

XYZ/99XYZ/99M1M1 -?--?-

Page 18: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Main Business Scenario

The Customer Service department at your companytakes orders from your customers.To process the business transaction, you have toenter the transaction as a sales order in the R/3System.

Once you have verified in the system that thedelivery can take place in accordance with thecustomer's wishes, you send the customer an orderconfirmation.

The further steps in sales are triggered by the salesorder and supplied with all the necessaryinformation.

Page 19: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Introduction

Where does sales fit into the sales and distributionprocess?

Sales document structure

Screens and information in the sales document

Unit Contents:

Page 20: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Introduction: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Explain how Sales links into the sales anddistribution chain

Describe the structure of a sales document

Locate information stored in the sales document

Page 21: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Introduction: Course Overview Diagram

7. Data flow8. Special Business Transactions

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

XYZ/99M1 -?-

11. Outlineagreements§

13. Freegoods

0,--

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

ORORLFLFF2F2

Page 22: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Introduction: Business Scenario

Your company, IDES Inc., wants to implement theSAP R/3 SD module.

Sales and distribution processes will also bemodeled in the R/3 System in future.

It is your responsibility to familiarize yourself withthe SD functionality in the R/3 System. You areparticularly interested in how sales fits into theprocess chain.

Page 23: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Processes in Sales and Distribution

MMAATTEERRIIAALLSS

MMAANNAAGGEEMMEENNTT

SalesSalesInformationInformation

SystemSystem

USD

SalessupportSalessupport

SalesSales

Shipping Shipping

BillingBilling

Financial accountingFinancial accounting

Outbound delivery

Debit memo Credit memoInvoice

Free-of-chargedelivery Order

Contract

Sched. agt

Sales activity

Inquiry

Quotation

Shipment

ReturnsFree-of-chargesubsequent

delivery

Every sales activity that you undertake in R/3 is recorded with a sales document.You can represent different business processes in Sales, Shipping and Billing with specifically designed document types:Sales document types (for example inquiries, quotations, standard orders)Delivery types (for example deliveries, return deliveries)Billing document types (for example, invoices, credit memos, debit memos)

Each document is identified with a unique document number. Matchcodes help you search for documents.Each document is assigned an overall status that reflects its processing status. The overall status depends on the different status values in the document. These different values reflect the processing status of the different steps of the sales activity.

Page 24: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

• Follows up activities from sales support• Enters orders• Determines prices• Decides on delivery requirements• Decides on requirements for creating invoices• Updates status and document flow• Updates the Sales Information System• Transfers requirements

Where Does Sales Fit Into the Sales andDistribution Process?

Page 25: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Item 10

Business dataConditionsPartnersTextsPurchase order dataetc.

Business data Conditions TextsPartnersetc.

SalesShippingProcurement

Header

Schedule line 1

Item 20Schedule line 1

Schedule line 2

Sales Document Structure

Each business process in the SAP System is represented as a document. For example, a sales document is created during sales order processing.The sales document consists of a document header and as many items as required. Each item can in turn contain as many schedule lines as needed.The document header contains general data and default values that are valid for the whole document.The document items contain data about the goods and services ordered by the customer. This includes material numbers, descriptions, prices and terms of delivery and payment.Data for shipping and procurement is located in schedule lines. Because the delivery deadline and order quantity are found in schedule lines, each line item with delivery requirements must contain at least one schedule line.

Page 26: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Summary

You are now able to:

Explain how Sales links into the sales anddistribution chain

Describe the structure of a sales document

Locate information stored in the sales document

Page 27: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercise Data Sheet

Key to Icons in Exercises and Solutions

Exercises

Solutions

Course Objectives

Business Scenario

Hints and Tips

Warning or Caution

The data on which the exercises are based was generated as a copy of the data from the IDES system. This enables you to run through the exercises again in an IDES system.

To do this, we recommend creating your own copies of the IDES data. For information on which data to use as a copy template, please refer to the Appendix.

Exercises

Unit: Introduction

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Find important information in the sales order screens

• Generate a subsequent document and display the document flow

Page 28: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

You are working in the order entry department and answer a telephone inquiry about a computer monitor. Based on this inquiry, you check your product line and create a quotation. Your customer places an order based on this quotation.

1-1 Your customer, T-S62A##, is interested in ordering your material T-ATA##.

1-1-1 Enter the inquiry with purchase order number ##LO605-IN01. Your customer needs 20 units and wants delivery in two weeks.

Inquiry number: ___________________________________

When you enter the inquiry, remember to take the requested delivery date into account.

1-1-2 Enter a corresponding quotation with reference to the inquiry (assign purchase order number ##LO605-OT01). Limit the validity of your quotation to one month.

Quotation number: __________________________________

Make sure to create with reference to the inquiry. To do this, choose Create with reference.

Page 29: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-3 After checking the quotation, your customer decides to order 5 units of the product. The requested delivery date is two weeks from today. Enter the standard order with purchase order ##LO605-OR01.

Order number: ___________________________________

Make sure to create with reference to the quotation. To do this, choose Create with reference.

1-1-4 Use the document flow from the quotation to see an overview of this sales process. What is the overall processing status of each document?

Inquiry: _________________________________Quotation: _________________________________Order: _________________________________

1-1-5 OptionalAfter checking the product, your customer decides to order the remaining 15 units. The requested delivery date is two weeks from today. Create another order with reference to your quotation. It should have purchase order number ##LO605-OR02.

1-1-6 OptionalReview the sales process by viewing document flow for the quotation. What is the overall processing status of each document now?

Inquiry: _________________________________Quotation: _________________________________Order: _________________________________Order: _________________________________

Page 30: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 You want to collect detailed information about the business transaction. To do this, display the inquiry, bring up document flow, and from there navigate into different documents as needed.

1-2-1 What is the unit price of the monitor in one of the orders?

Material price per unit (PR00):____________________________________

1-2-2 Which of your sales offices is responsible for this sale?

Sales office: ____________________________________

1-2-3 What is the name of the sales employee responsible for the sale?

Name: ____________________________________

1-2-4 Which division does your product belong to and which material pricing group has it been assigned to?

Division: ____________________________________

Material pricing group: ____________________________________

1-2-5 Which plant, shipping point and route will be used to deliver the goods?

Plant: ____________________________________

Shipping point: ____________________________________

Route: ____________________________________

1-2-6 What are the terms of delivery (Incoterms) and payment for your customer?

Incoterms: ____________________________________

Payment terms: ___________________________________

1-2-7 What date has the delivery been confirmed for?

Confirmed delivery date: ____________________________________

Page 31: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Unit: Introduction

1-1 Process the business transaction.

1-1-1 Create the inquiry and save the document.

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales RfQ CreateInquiry type: AFCustomer: T-S62A##Purchase order number: ##LO605-IN01Req. delivery date: Two weeks from todayMaterial: T-ATA## (20 units)Save the document.

1-1-2 Create the quotation with a reference to the inquiry.

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Quotation CreateQuotation type: ORChoose Create with reference.Inquiry number: From the above inquiryChoose Copy.Validity: From Today to one month from today Purchase order number: ##LO605-OT01Save the document.

1-1-3 Create the order with reference to the quotation.

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Order CreateOrder type: ORChoose Create with reference.Quotation number: From the above quotationRequested delivery date: Two weeks from todayChoose Selection list.Reduce the quantity.

Choose Copy.PO number: ##LO605-OR01Save the document.

Page 32: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-4 Display the document flow for the quotation.

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Quotation DisplayChoose Display document flow.

Inquiry: CompletedQuotation: Being processedOrder: Open

1-1-5 OptionalCreate another order with reference to the quotation.

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Order CreateOrder type: ORChoose Create with reference.Quotation number: From the above quotationRequested delivery date: Two weeks from todayChoose Copy.PO number: ##LO605-OR02Save the document.

1-1-6 OptionalDisplay the document flow for the quotation.

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Quotation DisplayChoose Display document flow.

Inquiry: CompletedQuotation: CompletedOrder: OpenOrder: Open

Page 33: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Find the required information in the documents.

1-2-1 Display the document flow for the Inquiry. Determine the unit price in the Conditions item screen.

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales RfQ DisplayChoose Display document flow.Select an order and choose Display document.Select the item and choose Item conditionsUnit price (PR00): 2.299,-

1-2-2 Choose Goto Header and then Sales.

Sales office: 1000 Frankfurt office1-2-3 Choose tab page Partners.

Sales employee: 1701 Melanie Mayer

1-2-4 Select the item, choose Display Item Details and then choose Sales B.

Division: 07 High TechMaterial pricing group: Standard parts

1-2-5 Choose Shipping.

Plant: 1200 DresdenShipping point: 1200 Shipping point DresdenRoute: R00130 Dresden - Frankfurt

1-2-6 Choose Billing.

Incoterms: CFR MainzPayment terms: ZB01 14 days 3%, 30/2%, 45 net

1-2-7 Choose Schedule lines.

Confirmed delivery date: Date of line with the confirmed quantity

Page 34: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution

Unit Contents:

Organizational units in the SAP R/3 System

Organizational Structures in Sales

Including Sales in the enterprise organizationalstructure

Page 35: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Enterprise Structures: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Use organizational units in the SAP R/3 Systemto model the different areas at your company

Set up enterprise structures by assigning themto organizational units

Adjust the organizational structures to meet thelegal and business requirements of yourcompany

Page 36: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Enterprise Structures: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0,-- ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special businesstransactions

9. Incomp-leteness

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

Page 37: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Enterprise Structures: Business Scenario

Your company, IDES Inc., has been using the SAPR/3 SD module successfully for years

Company management has now decided to expandthe company's sales activities. In the future,customers should also be able to place orders attrade fairs

It must be possible to control and evaluate the newsales activities separately from all existingactivities

Your responsibility is to expand the enterprisestructure in sales accordingly

Page 38: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Enterprise Structures in the SAP R/3 System

EnterprisestructuresEnterpriseEnterprisestructuresstructures

Cost accountingCost accounting

External logisticsExternal logistics

AccountingAccounting

Internal logistics(materials plan./production)

Internal logistics(materials plan./production)

Inventory managementInventory management

Organizational units in theSAP system

Organizational units in theOrganizational units in theSAP systemSAP system

Sales organizationsSales organizations Purchasing organizationsPurchasing organizations

Company codesCompany codes

Valuation areasValuation areas

Storage locations/Batches/Special stocksStorage locations/Batches/Special stocks

PlantsPlants

CompanyCompany

Controlling areasControlling areas

Objectives of the organizational structures in R/3 are to:Achieve flexibility in representing complex corporate structuresAdapt to changes in the corporate structureDistinguish between views in logistics (sales and distribution, purchasing, etc.), cost accounting and financial accountingProcess data across company codes

Page 39: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

How SD Is Integrated in Financial Accounting

Client

Company code1000

1000

2000

3000

4000

Company code2000

1000

2000

Businessarea 4000

All of the organizational units within a client are subject to one business control. Therefore, a client can be considered to be a synonym for the group. A client is a self-contained technical unit. General data and tables that are used for several organizational structures are stored at this level.You can use the company code and business area to represent a group from a financial accounting viewpoint. You can create several company codes for every client, in order to carry out financial accounting for several independent companies simultaneously. At least one company code must be created, however.Each company code represents an independent accounting unit. Several company codes can use the same chart of accounts. A business area is a separate business unit for which cross-company code internal reporting can be carried out. Business areas are not limited by company codes. For this reason, the business areas in all company codes must have the same description. Using this organizational unit is optional. You will use business areas if you if you want to calculate profit and loss statements independently of the company code. In the case of postings made from sales and distribution, the business area can be derived automatically.

Page 40: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Organizational Structures in Sales

Salesorganization

Distributionchannel

Division

Sales area

10001000

10001000

Sales officeSalesgroup

A variety of organizational units are available for modeling sales business transactions. In the sales area, the following organizational structures can be defined and used to model and structure the sales structures:Sales organizationDistribution channelDivisionSales areaSales officeSales groupOther organizational units in SD, such as the shipping point and the transportation planning point, are covered in other SD courses.

Page 41: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Organization

Client

Company code1000

SlOrg 1000

SlOrg 1020 SlOrg 2000

Company code2000

A sales organization represents the organizational structures in sales and distribution. Each sales organization represents a selling unit as a legal entity. It is, for example, responsible for product liability and other customer rights of recourse. You can use sales organizations to subdivide markets into regions. Each business transaction is processed within a sales organization.A sales organization is assigned to exactly one company code.A sales organization is assigned to one or more plants.Each sales organization has its own master data, for example, its own customer and material master data as well as condition records.

Page 42: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Distribution channel

12 Resale

SlOrg 1000

10 End customer

Distributionchannel

You can use different distribution channels in Sales and Distribution to provide the market with the best possible service. Distribution channels provide a general structure for distributing goods. Wholesale trade, sales to industrial customers or direct sales from a plant are typical examples of distribution channels.Distribution channels can be set up according to your company's market strategy or internal organization.Customers can be served through one or more distribution channels within a sales organization. In addition, you can vary the master data relevant to sales, such as customer master data, sales master data, prices, and surcharges/discounts, for each sales organization and distribution channel.

Page 43: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Division

SlOrg 1000

Division

07 High Tech02 Motorcycles

A broad product range can be divided into divisions. In the SAP system, you can also define a division-specific sales structure.You can make customer-specific agreements for each division, for example regarding partial deliveries or pricing. Within a division, you can carry out statistical analyses or devise your own marketing strategies.

Page 44: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Area

Sales areasSales areas

Sales org.Frankfurt

Sales org.London

Distribution channelEnd customer

Distribution channelResale

DivisionMotorcycles

DivisionHigh Tech

DivisionMotorcycles

DivisionMotorcycles

DivisionHigh Tech

A sales area is a combination of sales organization, distribution channel and division.Sales documents, delivery documents, and billing documents are always assigned to a sales area. Every sales process always takes in a specific sales area.The relevant master data can usually be maintained explicitly for each sales area, for example: Sales-relevant customer master dataSales-relevant material master data (the division is a general field of the material master; as a result, a material can only be assigned to one division.)Conditions (prices, discounts/surcharges)

You can carry out analyses within a sales area, for example, by evaluation sales volume. You should try to keep the organizational structure of a sales area as simple as possible.

Page 45: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Office and Sales Group

Sales-personSales-person

Sales groupSales group

Sales officeSales office

10001000

10001000

Sales area

Sales officeNorthern Region

Group110

Cole

Group111

Brown

Group115

Bays

Sales officeSouthern Region

Group100

Young Wise

Group101

Miller Lopez

Sales officeGeographical aspects of the organizational structures in business development and sales are defined using sales offices. A sales office can be viewed as an actual office or perhaps a territory or region. Sales offices can be assigned to multiple sales areas. If you enter a sales order for a sales office within a particular sales area, the sales office must be permitted for that sales area.

Sales groupEmployees of a sales office can be assigned to sales groups defined for each division or distribution channel. Sales groups are assigned to sales offices.

SalespersonA sales group consists of a certain number of salespersons. A salesperson is assigned to a sales office and group in the sales employee master record. Thereafter you can select this personnel master record in the partner screen of a sales document.

You can carry out sales analyses on the different internal organization levels.

Page 46: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Plant

Client

Company code1000

Plant . . .

Company code3000

Plant . . .

Plant 1200

Plant 1000

Plant 3100

Plant 3000

Materials management is primarily concerned with the flow of materials within a company. Production facilities and locations for storing stock must therefore be defined in the system. The terms used in the system for these entities are plant and storage location. Material stocks can be described in detail at the level of different storage locations within a plant. A plant can either be a location for production and material requirements planning (MRP) or it may simply represent one or more material stock locations in close proximity to one another.Each plant is assigned to a unique company code.For a plant to deliver goods to customers, it must be configured appropriately as a delivering plant in SD customizing. During the sales process, the delivering plants are first used to verify the stocks, and later to supply the goods the customer has ordered.

Page 47: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Delivering Plant

Client

Company code 1000 Company code 2000

Plant 1100 Plant 1400 Plant 1200

000102

100012

220010

Plant 2200

The plants from which the Sales department delivers the materials ordered (delivering plants) must be assigned to a sales organization and a distribution channel (distribution chain) in Customizing. By making the plant dependent on the distribution channel, you can differentiate further between plants within a sales organization for sales. This would allow the distribution channel "direct sales" for certain plants in a sales organization but not for others.One plant can be assigned to several distribution chains as the delivering plant. It can also be assigned to several sales organizations.It is also possible for the delivering plant of a distribution chain to belong to a different independent company in the corporate group (that is, the plant belongs to a different company code to the sales organization). This is called cross-company sales. This topic is discussed in detail in training course LO925 Cross-Application Business Processes in SD and MM.

Page 48: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Enterprise Structures: Conclusion

You are now able to:

Use organizational units in the SAP R/3 System tomodel the different areas at your company

Set up enterprise structures by assigning them toorganizational units

Adjust the organizational structures to meet thelegal and business requirements of your company

Page 49: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Unit: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Describe the structure of the IDES company for sales and distribution

• Set up your own enterprise structures for sales and distribution in the SAP system

You have joined the project team that is implementing the SAP System at your company.

As the employee responsible for sales, you need to familiarize yourself with the structure that has already been created and verify the settings.

You will expand the existing enterprise structure for your sales organization to include the new distribution channel e-Sales.

The required settings are located in the Implementation Guide (IMG) under the IMG node for Enterprise Structure. You can find some of the organizational data in Sales and Distribution and other data in the Financial Accounting and Logistics - General areas.

Page 50: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

DATA SHEETEnterprise Structures

Organizational units Key Description

Sales organization 1000

Distribution channel • Final customer sales

• Service

Division Cross-division

Sales office •

Sales group •

Company code

Plant • 1200•••

1-1 The project team has already modeled your company’s organizational structure in the R/3 System. Familiarize yourself with the organizational units that have been set up to model your company’s organizational structure. Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate.

1-1-1 What is the description of your sales organization 1000? Which currency is used to update the statistics? What is the address?

Description: _________________________________Statistics currency: Name: _________________________________Address: _________________________________

_________________________________

Page 51: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-2 Which distribution channels have been defined for Final customer sale and Service?

Distr. channel:_________________________________Distribution channel: _________________________________

1-1-3 Which division has been created for cross-division sales?

Division: _________________________________

1-2 Familiarize yourself with the enterprise structures that are relevant for sales that have been configured as organizational structures. Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate.

1-2-1 The organizational units determined above have been used to configure various sales areas for your sales organization 1000.Which sales areas have been defined?

Sales organization Distribution channel

Division

Sales area 1000Sales area 1000

1-2-2 Determine the sales offices responsible for managing sales in sales area 1000 / 10 / 00.

Sales office: _________________________________Sales office: _________________________________Sales office: _________________________________

1-2-3 Add some examples of the sales groups assigned to the sales offices listed above.

Office: ________________ Sales group: __________________ Sales group: __________________

Office: ________________ Sales group: __________________ Sales group: __________________

Page 52: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2-4 Which company code does your sales organization belong to?

Company code: _________________________________

Which currency is defined for this company code?

Currency: _________________________________

1-2-5 Enter the delivering plants that are assigned to sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10 in your data sheet.

Delivering plant: _________________________________Delivering plant: _________________________________Delivering plant: _________________________________Delivering plant: _________________________________

2-1 OptionalTo meet their goal of establishing new, modern sales possibilities, your management board has approved a project for establishing eSales as a new sales channel at your company. Management wants to be able to track the sales and revenues from these transactions separately, and pricing procedures that are different from all other sales processes must be possible.

Configure the new organizational units you need.

2-1-1 Define a new distribution channel for e-sales.

Please use the Define distribution channel function, NOT Copy, delete, check distribution channel.Background:

The Define distribution channel function (only) creates a new distribution channel. The much more powerful function Copy, delete, check distribution channel allows you to copy all of the distribution channel-specific settings from the template. You can also perform this synchronization later. This function is extremely useful and efficient in projects. In this course, however, you are responsible for performing the corresponding Customizing steps yourself.

Distr. channel:Y = 70 + ## (for group 19, for example: Y = 70 + 19 = 89) Description: eSales ##

Page 53: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

2-1-2 An independent staff is being trained to process the orders received through e-Sales. Organizationally, these employees will be grouped together in a sales office. Set up the new sales office Ze## eOffice ## for this group. Use sales office 1000 as a template.

2-2 Optional

Enhance the existing sales organization structures by integrating new organizational units.

2-2-1 Assign the new distribution channel to your sales organization 1000.

2-2-2 Build new sales areas with your sales organization, Z000, the new distribution channel, and divisions 00, 01, and 07.

2-2-3 Make sure that deliveries for orders from the new sales areas can take place at your distribution centers at the Hamburg, Dresden, and Stuttgart plants.

2-2-4 Configure Customizing so that orders entered for your new sales area, Z000 / Y / 00, can be assigned to your new sales office ZE## eOffice ## as the responsible internal organizational unit.

Page 54: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Unit: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution

DATA SHEETEnterprise Structures

Organizational units Key Description

Sales organization 1000 Germany Frankfurt

Distribution channel • 10 Final customer sales

• 14 Service

Division 00 Cross-division

Sales office • 1000 Office Hamburg

• 1010 Office Frankfurt

• 1030 Office Stuttgart

Sales group (example) • 1000 / 100 Gr. F1 Mr. Anton

• 1000 / 101 Gr. F2 Mr. Mayer

• 1010 / 110 Gr. H1 Mr. Thomas

• 1030 / 130 Gr. S1 Ms. Chmiel

Company code 1000 IDES AG 1000

Plant • 1200• 1000• 1100• 1300

DresdenHamburgBerlinFrankfurt

Page 55: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1 Go to the SAP Reference IMG and navigate to the definition of the organizational units. Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate.

Tools Accelerated SAP Customizing Edit ProjectChoose SAP Reference IMG Enterprise Structure Definition

1-1-1 Find the definition of sales organization 1000.

Sales and Distribution Define, copy, delete, check sales organization.Choose Define Sales Organization.

Description: Germany Frankfurt Statistics currency: UNIChoose Address.

Name: IDES Deutschland - Frankfurt Address: Friedrich-Naumann-Straße 16

60486 Frankfurt/M

1-1-2 Find the description of the distribution channels.

Sales and Distribution Define, copy, delete, check distribution channelChoose Define distribution channel.

Distr. channel:10 Final customer saleDistribution channel: 14 Service

1-1-3 Find the description of the division.

Logistics – General Define, copy, delete, check divisionChoose Define division.

Division: 00 Cross-division

Page 56: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Navigate to the assignment of the organizational units to enterprise structures. Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate.

Enterprise structure Assignment

1-2-1 Go to the assignment of sales areas.

Sales and Distribution Set up sales area

Sales organization Distribution channel

Division

Sales area 1000 10 00Sales area 1000 14 00

1-2-2 Go to the assignment of sales offices.

Sales and Distribution Assign sales office to sales areaSales office: 1000 Office FrankfurtSales office: 1010 Office HamburgSales office: 1030 Office Stuttgart

1-2-3 Go to the assignment of sales groups.

Sales and Distribution Assign sales group to sales officeOffice: 1000 Sales group: 100 Gr. F1 Mr. Anton

Sales group: 101 Gr. F2 Mr. MayerSales group: 103 Gr. F3 Mr. Ludwig

Office: 1010 Sales group: 110 Gr. H1 Mr. ThomasSales group: Gr. H2 Mr. Thiel

Office: 1030 Sales group: 130 Gr. S1 Ms. ChmielSales group: 131 Gr. S2 Mr. Kaysers

Page 57: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2-4 Go to the assignment of the company codes.

Sales and Distribution Assign sales organization to company code

Company code: 1000 IDES AG

Go to the definition of the company codes.

Enterprise structure Definition Financial Accounting Define, copy, delete, check company code . . Choose Edit company code data.

Currency: UNI

1-2-5 Go to the assignment of plants in Sales and Distribution.

Enterprise structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign sales organization - distribution channel - plant

Delivering plant: 1000 HamburgDelivering plant: 1100 BerlinDelivering plant: 1200 DresdenDelivering plant: 1300 Frankfurt

2-1 Optional

Create new organizational units for Sales and Distribution.

2-1-1 Create a new distribution channel Y eSales ## (Y=70 + ##).

Enterprise structure Definition Sales and Distribution Define, copy, delete, check distribution channelChoose Define distribution channel.

Distr. channel:Y = 70 + ## (for group 19, for example: Y = 70 + 19 = 89) Description: eSales ##

Page 58: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

2-1-2 Set up the new sales office Ze## eOffice ##.

Sales and Distribution Maintain sales officeSelect sales office 1000 and choose Copy as...

2-2 Optional

Assign the new organizational units to the existing structure.

2-2-1 Assign the new distribution channel to your sales organization 1000.

Enterprise structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign distribution channel to sales organization

2-2-2 Set up the new sales areas.

Sales and Distribution Set up sales area

2-2-3 Assign delivering plants to the new distribution chain.

Sales and Distribution Assign sales organization - distribution channel - plant

2-2-4 Assign your new sales office Ze## eOffice ## to a sales area.

Sales and Distribution Assign sales office to sales area

Page 59: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Order Processing

Processing sales orders

Ways of creating sales orders

Help creating sales orders

Unit Contents:

Page 60: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Order Processing: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Find and use the tools and help for entering andprocessing sales orders

Determine the origin of document data fromvarious sources, like the material master, thecustomer master, or customizing

Page 61: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Order Processing: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0.00 ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special businesstransactions

9. Incomp-leteness

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales order processing

10. Partnerdetermination

Page 62: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Order Processing: Business Scenario

Your company, IDES Inc., has been using the SAPR/3 SD module successfully for years.

You now want to further optimize the processes ofentering and processing sales orders.

To do this, you want to extract the document dataas default values and fixed values from the masterdata and other sources.

You want to take full advantage of the aids andtools that are available for creating documents.

It is your responsibility to familiarize yourself withthe techniques for creating and processingdocuments in the R/3 System.

Page 63: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Overview: Sources for Document Data

...

...

...

IMGCustomizing

Master data Customer masterMaterial masterConditions. . .

Existingdocumentdata

Information sources are:

Hard-codedcontrols form XY_001.

sy-subrc = 4. check: FeldX ne FeldY. sy-subrc = 0.endform.Program

Program

ABAP/4 Editor

Order

Example: Sales document type: delivery block,shipping condition

e.g., determination of shipping point

Example: The delivering plant at item level as thebasis for determining the shipping point

Example: Customer master: Plant, shippingcondition

Example: Material master: Plant, loading group

Example: Weighting the different sources ofinformation during plant determination

During data input for sales documents, the system supports you by analyzing various sources of information. The aim is to make creating documents easier by using default values or fixed reference data. Possible sources of information are:

Master data: The system reads the master data defined for a customer, a material, or a pricing condition. For example, the specific terms of payment for a customer can be found. The sales information from a material master can serve as the source of the delivering plant. Existing document data: Document data that has already been entered or determined automatically by the system can be used to enter additional documents data. For example, the delivering plant is used - along with other information - to determine the shipping point.Customizing: Default values for creating documents can be defined in Customizing. For example, you can set a default value for the delivery date or configure a delivery or billing block in the sales document type. You can also define strategies in Customizing for determining document information based on combinations of several criteria (for example: determining the shipping point through a combination of delivering plant, loading group, and shipping condition).Hard-coded controls: Hard-coded controls can be used to weight the different sources of information (example: proposing plants automatically).

Page 64: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Order Entry - Deriving the Sales Area

Order

Sold-to party:C1 Smith Inc.

Sales area:1000 10 00Item:M1 Material 1

Ship-to party:S1 Smith Inc.

Customer master

Smith Inc.C1

Each sales order is assigned to a unique sales area (sales organization, distribution channel, division).When you enter a sales order you don't need to specify the sales area immediately. If you don't, the system automatically derives the sales area from the sold-to party. If there is master data for the sold-to party in several sales areas, a selection screen appears where you can choose the sales area you require.

Note: You can also create the master record for a new sold-to party from within the document creation transaction.

Page 65: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Proposing Order Data from Master Data

Customer master

Business partnersPricingTax determinationDelivery schedulingPaymentsOutput

Material master

Pricing Tax determinationWeights / volumesAvailability checksDelivery scheduling Delivery controlsPlants

Master data

Conditions

Master data

OutputMaster data

Texts

Master dataCustomer-

material info

Item

10

20

30

Material

M1

M2

M3

Quantity

10

20

15

Order

Sold-to party: C1Ship-to party: S1

It is advisable to store as much data as possible in master records in the R/3 System. This will save you time during order entry and help you to avoid incorrect entries.You can enter different types of master data in the R/3 System, such as information on business partners, materials, customer/material, item proposals, bills of material, prices, discounts and rebates, taxes, freight, output and texts. . The system will frequently access this data during order processing.In the order overview, you can create items for the ordering party by entering customer-specific material numbers.

Page 66: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Business Partners from the Customer Master

Bill-to party Payer

Ship-to partySold-to party

Customer master

The essential business partners for a sales transaction are the sold-to party, ship-to party, payer and bill-to party. These business partners play various roles (called partner functions) in the business process.You can maintain a customer master record for each partner. There is a suitable entry screen for each type of business partner.When you enter a sales document, you can also enter the ship-to party instead of the sold-to party. The system then determines the sold-to party from the ship-to party. If there is exactly one sold-to party for the ship-to party, the system can do this automatically.If there are several possible sold-to parties for the ship-to party, the system displays a selection screen with the possible alternatives. If a sold-to party cannot be determined, the system issues an error message in the status bar.A message also tells you if you entered a ship-to party in the sold-to party field inadvertently. The system then continues to process the data as if you had entered the ship-to party in the ship-to party field.

Page 67: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Proposing Order Data from the Customer Master

Terms of payment Terms of payment Credit limit checkCredit limit check

OrderSold-to party:

Ship-to party:

Payer:

Bill-to party:

Item..

Material..

Quantity..

Customer master C1

PricingPricing IncotermsIncotermsShipping conditionsShipping conditions

Customer master S1

Ship-to addressShip-to addressGoods receiving hoursGoods receiving hoursTaxTax

Customer master E1

Billing address

Customer master R1

C1

S1

R1

E1

The business data in a sales document is taken from the master data records for the different business partners.Because the ship-to party can be in a different place to the sold-to party, the delivery address and tax information are taken from the ship-to party's master record. Because the payer is responsible for paying your receivables, the payment conditions in the document come from the payer's master record.The bill-to party contains the address to which the invoice should be sent. This address could be different from that of the payer.

Page 68: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Business Data

Order 2HEADERPayment cond.: ZB01Incoterms : FOB

Order 1

Different data at itemlevel not possible

Changes possible, as separatebusiness data is allowed atitem level

HEADERPayment cond.: ZB01Incoterms: FOB

Copy CopyItem 10Payment cond.: ZB01Incoterms: FOB

Item 20Payment cond.: ZB01Incoterms: FOB

Item 10Payment cond.: ZB01Incoterms: FOB

Item 20Payment cond.: ZB01

ZB02Incoterms: FOB EXW

You can define business data (such as payment conditions, Incoterms) at the document header or for each item.You can decide in Customizing for the item category whether the business data at item level can differ to the business data at header level. You define this option separately for each item category. This allows you to create documents containing both items in which the business data must be identical to the sales document header and items that allow different business data.

Page 69: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Proposing Plants Automatically

Delivering plant: 1100

Sold-to party: C2Ship-to party: S1

Item Material Quantity Plant10 M1 10 110020 M2 10 1100

Sold-to party: C3Ship-to party: S2

Item Material Quantity Plant10 M1 10 110020 M2 10 1200

Customer-material infoC1 M1 Cust.mat. PC-100

Sold-to party: C1Ship-to party: S1

Customer materialPC-100

Item

10

Quantity

10

Plant

1400

Material master M1

Customer master S1

Delivering plant: 1400

Delivering plant: 1000

Material master M2Delivering plant: 1200

The plant is an integral part of Logistics. It assumes the role of a delivering plant in SD. When you enter an item to be delivered, the R/3 System attempts to determine a delivering plant automatically from the master data. If the search is successful, the results are copied to the document item. You can change this plant manually. During its search, the system checks several master data records:First, it checks whether it can propose a delivering plant from an entry in the customer-material info record.If the customer-material info record doesn't contain a plant, or if there aren't any customer-material info records, the system checks the customer master record for the ship-to party.If this search is unsuccessful, the delivering plant is determined from the material master record.If there isn't a plant in the material master record, the system will be unable to determine a valid plant. And if the system is unable to determine a valid plant, it cannot determine any other document data, either. For example, it would not be possible to automatically determine the shipping point. Furthermore, no availability check is possible, and no delivery can be created.Note: If necessary, you can use a USEREXIT to enhance the standard system.

Page 70: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Summary

Sales Summary for Customer 5264

Address

IDES Inc.Neurottstr. 16D-69190 Walldorf

Quick infoLast order 5638Max. credit limit used 68%Orders with billing block 2

Key figuresAnnual sales 200 000 000 UNIEmployees 604Legal status Limited liability company

. . .

Info blocks

Address

Key figures

Quick info

Contact persons

Last SD documents

Document key figures

Pricing

. . .

The sales summary helps to create documents by displaying a variety of relevant information about the customer. This information is available through a pushbutton at any time during document processing.The information in the sales summary is grouped into info blocks on various topics. You can configure the info block views according to topic yourself in Customizing.

Page 71: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Overview: Changing Sales Documents

Fast changes in document

Order

Concurrent change to several items

Fast change of severaldocuments

Order

Plant 20001200

Order

Plant 20001200

Order

Plant 20001200

Order

Plant 20001200

Changes through document list

Item 10Item 20. . .

Mat-12Mat-10. . .

Plant 1200Plant 1200. . . . . .

20002000. . .

Blocking documents

DeliveryOrder

Delivery and billing block

Deliveryblock:

Rejecting documents

OrderQuotation

Rejecting sales documents

Reason for rejection:03

Different options are available for changing document data:Fast change in document: The fast change function allows you to change several - or all - items of a document at the same time (for example: changing the delivering plant or delivery date, settings blocks, rejections)Changing several documents: You can use the document list to change the plant, currency, materials, and pricing in several documents at the same time. The mass change tool for documents supports comprehensive changes to the selected sales documents.Blocking documents: You can block specific documents for subsequent process steps, like shipping and billing (see next slides).Rejecting documents: You can reject items of sales documents. This blocks them from being copied to subsequent documents.

Page 72: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Blocks

OrderBlocks

Header Delivery block/billing block

Item 10 Billing block

Item 20 Sched. line 1 Sched. line 2 Deliv. block

User setsand removesblocks

Definingblocks inCustomizing

...

...

...

IMG

In sales orders, you can block the transactions:For shippingFor billing

You can set a billing block in the document header and in the individual items. You can customize the delivery block to configure the detailed effects of that block in shipping processing. For example, you can generally prevent the creation of a delivery, or allow processing of the delivery and picking but block the goods issue, and so on (see Appendix).You can set a billing block in the document header and in the individual items.You can enter reasons for rejection for one or more items. In copying control you can stop this item from being copied into subsequent documents.The "Fast change" function enables you to simultaneously block all the items that you have selected in the document.

Page 73: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Reject

Item 30 M3 30 PC

Item 10 M1 10 PC

Order

Quotation

Item 10 M1 10 PC

Item 20 M2 20 PC Reas. f. rejection: 03 too expen.

Item 30 M3 30 PC

Sold-to party: C1

Sold-to party: C1x

You can enter a reason for rejection for one or several items. You can create a suitable copying requirement in copying control to prevent these items from being copied into subsequent documents.For example, if a customer doesn't want some of the items in a quotation, you can assign a reason for rejection to those items. This gives the items the status completed. The business transaction can thus be concluded without deleting the item.Reasons for rejection also allow you to verify what your customers think of your products during a certain time period. The marketing department can use these results as an important planning tool for their strategies in the next sales period.The "Fast change" function allows you to reject several or all items of a document at the same time. A special pushbutton is also available for rejecting all the items in a document.

Page 74: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Re-determined Data Customer master

Customer-material info record

Texts

Free Goods

Prices

Output

Plant and shipping point

Unchanged Data Sales area

Sales office and sales group

Availability and productallocation

Batches

No changes if there are: Status-relevant precedingStatus-relevant preceding

documentsdocuments Subsequent documentsSubsequent documents

Change Sold-to Party in Sales Document

At times, it can be beneficial to start entering individual items before you enter the sold-to party, especially when phone sales are involved.Because a sold-to party is always required to create a sales document, a default value must be set in the sold-to party field. You can do this with your user-specific parameters or - depending on the sales document type - with a transaction variant.The incompleteness log of the sales document ensures that the person responsible replaces the default customer value with the actual sold-to party.To do this, the default sold-to party must be flagged as such in the customer master (activate customer type Default SP).When the sold-to party is changed, the changed value runs through the same checks as the initial entry. As a result, a variety of data is re-determined - such as texts, prices, and delivering plant. You can also change the ship-to party later on the overview screen. However, the system does not re-determine the sold-to party in this case.

Page 75: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Order Processing: Summary

You are now able to:

Find and use the tools and help for entering andprocessing sales orders

Determine the origin of document data fromvarious sources, like the material master, thecustomer master, or customizing

Page 76: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Unit: Sales Order Processing

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Use the different tools for processing orders

• Explain how master data is proposed in sales documents

The order clerk only has to enter a few items when creating sales documents. The majority of the information is copied from the master data.

1-1 Create a standard order for product T-ATC## (1 unit) with purchase order number ##LO605-OR03.

1-1-1 Do not specify the sales area (delete any values that default).The ship-to party is T-S62F##.

1-1-2 Which sold-to party is determined by the system?

Sold-to party: _________________________________

1-1-3 Which sales area is automatically determined by the system?

Sales area: _________________________________ Where does the system find this information?

_____________________________________________________

Page 77: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Your customer T-S62A## places an order with you. They want the delivery to take place in 30 days. The purchase order number is ##LO605-OR04.

1-2-1 Enter the first item for material T-ATC## (quantity: 5 units).You offer the following terms of payment to your customer for this item: 14 days 3%, 30 days 2%, 45 days net.

Terms of payment: _________________________________

1-2-2 Enter another item with material T-ATD## (20 units).This item has different terms of payment: 20 days 2%, 30 days net. This material should also be delivered to another address. Change the ship-to party of this item to your customer T-S62B##.

Terms of payment: _________________________________

1-2-3 Deliver the order on the delivery date requested by your customer. What message appears in the log?

______________________________________________________

If necessary, set the selection date for the delivery to two weeks from today.

1-2-4 Which delivering plant is determined by the system?

Delivering plant for item 10: _____________________________Delivering plant for item 20: _____________________________

1-2-5 Which master records does the system use to extract this information?

______________________________________________________

1-3 Your plant 1000 contains stock for material T-ATD##. This is the material that should be delivered from this plant, when customer T-S62A## orders it.

1-3-1 Create a customer-material information record so that this material is always taken from plant 1000 for this customer.

1-3-2 The customer manages this material with number PC-M-## and description PC-Monitor ##. Enter these details in the customer-material info record.

Page 78: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3-3 You receive an order from customer T-S62A## with purchase order number ##LO605-OR05. The order consists of 12 monitors, which the customer manages under material number PC-M-##. The customer wants to receive the delivery in two weeks. Create the sales order.

Can you fulfill the customer’s requested delivery date?

Which plant will be used to supply the delivery?

You can use the Ordering Party overview screen to enter items with the customer’s purchase order numbers.

Your customer tells you that she would like to add to her purchase order number ##LO605-OR05.

1-4-1 Enter another item with 16 units of material T-ATE##. The delivery date is in two week’s time.

1-4-2 You have also agreed to give your customer a free goods item of 1 unit of material T-ATE##. Enter the corresponding sub-item.

1.4.3 Is this item included in the net value of the order?

____________________________________

1-5 Optional Your customer can get the first order item of document ##LO605-OR05 for a better price somewhere else, so they reject this item.

1-5-1 Cancel this item by entering the relevant reason for rejection (save the order before going onto the next step.

Page 79: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-5-2 Display the delivery and rejection status for the order.

Overall processing: ______________Header - Delivery status: ______________Header - Rejection status: ______________

Item 10 Overall processing: ______________ Item - Delivery status:______________ Header - Rejection status: ______________

Item 20 Overall processing: ______________ Item - Delivery status:______________ Header - Rejection status: ______________

1-5-3 Create a delivery for this order with shipping point 1200. The delivery date is two weeks from today. Decrease the quantity of the first item in the delivery by half.Save the delivery. Check the status of the order.

Overall processing: ______________Header - Delivery status: ______________

Item 20 Overall processing: ______________ Item - Delivery status:______________

Item 30 Overall processing: ______________ Item - Delivery status:______________

1-5-4 Create another delivery for the order and deliver the remaining quantity. Check the status again.

Overall processing: ______________Header - Delivery status: ______________ Header - Rejection status: ______________

Item 20 Overall processing: ______________ Item - Delivery status:______________

Page 80: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Unit: Sales Order Processing

1-1 Enter the standard order.

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Order Create

1-1-1 Order type: ORShip-to party: T-S62F##Purchase order number: ##LO605-OR03

1-1-2 Sold-to party: T-S62E## HiTech AG

1-1-3 Sales area: 1000 / 10 / 00 In the first step, the system determines the sold-to party from the ship-to party. The sales area is then determined from the sold-to party’s master record.

1-2 Enter the standard order.

1-2-1 Enter the item.

Order type: ORSold-to party: T-S62A##Purchase order number: ##LO605-OR04Material: T-ATC## (5 units)Terms of payment: ZB01

1-2-2 Enter another item.

Material: T-ATD## (20 units)Terms of payment: ZB03Ship-to party: T-S62B##

Page 81: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2-3 Deliver the order on the delivery date requested by your customer.

Logistics Sales and Distribution Shipping and transportation Outbound Delivery Create Single document With reference to sales order

Shipping point: 1200Selection date:Two weeks from today.

Choose Error log.

“Item 000020: delivery split because the partners are different.”The cause is that the two order items are to be delivered to different ship-to parties, which means each must be on a separate delivery.

1-2-4 Delivering plant for item 10: 1200Delivering plant for item 20: 1200

1-2-5 In which master records does the system find this information? From the material master records

1-3 Save the agreement with your customer as a master record.

Logistics Sales and distribution Master data Agreements

1-3-1 Create a customer-material information record.

Customer-material information Create

Customer: T-S62A##Sales organization: 1000 Distribution channel: 10Material: T-ATD##Delivering plant: 1000

1-3-2 Complete the customer number and name for the material.

Customer material: PC-M-## Customer description: PC Monitor ##

Page 82: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3-3 Enter the standard order.

Sold-to party: T-S62A##Purchase order number: ##LO605-OR05 Requested delivery date: Two weeks from todayCustomer material: PC-M-## (12 units)The requested delivery date can be met. Delivery will take place from plant 1000, as agreed.

1-4 Add to the order with purchase order number ##LO605-TA05.

1-4-1 material: T-ATE## (16 units)Delivery date: Two weeks from today

1-4-2 Enter the sub-item.

material: T-ATE## (1 unit) Higher-level item: 20

1-4-3 Is this item included in the net value of the order?

Select the free goods item and choose Item conditions.

No. The net value of the item is zero.

1-5 Optional Change the order with purchase order number ##LO605-OR05.

1-5-1 Reject the first item.

Reason for rejection: 03 too expen.1-5-2 Display the delivery and rejection status for the order.

Choose Status overview and then expand all.Overall processing: Being processed Header - Delivery status: Not delivered Header - Rejection status: Partially rejected

Item 10 Overall processing: Completed Item - Delivery status: Not delivered Item - Rejection status: Fully rejected

Item 20 Overall processing: OpenItem - Delivery status: Not delivered Item - Rejection status: Nothing rejected

Page 83: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-5-3 Create the delivery.

Logistics Sales and Distribution Shipping and transportation Outbound Delivery Create Single document With reference to sales order

Shipping point: 1200Selection date:Two weeks from today.

Delivery quantity of item 10: 8 units.

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Order DisplayChoose Status overview and then expand all.

Overall processing: Being processed Header - Delivery status: Partially delivered

Item 20 Overall processing: Being processed Item - Delivery status: Partially delivered

Item 30 Overall processing: Completed Item - Delivery status: Fully delivered

1-5-4 Deliver the open order quantity.

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Order DisplayChoose Status overview and then expand all.

Overall processing: Completed Header - Delivery status: Partially deliveredHeader - Rejection status: Partially rejected

Item 20 Overall processing: Completed Item - Delivery status: Fully delivered

Page 84: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Controlling Sales Documents with Sales DocumentTypes

Document types in Sales

Sales document functions

Sales document structure and data

System settings for sales documents

Assigning organizational units

Unit Contents:

Page 85: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Document Type: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Identify the elements that control the salesdocuments

Name examples of different sales documenttypes used for different business processes

Explain what the sales document type does Create Customizing settings for the sales

document type Restrict the validity of sales document types to

sales areas

Page 86: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Document Type: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0.00 ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special businesstransactions

9. Incomp-leteness

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales order processing

10. Partnerdetermination

Page 87: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Document Type: Business Scenario

Your company, IDES Inc., has been using the SAPR/3 SD module successfully for years.

Company management has now decided toexpand the company's sales activities. In thefuture, customers should also be able to placeorders at trade fairs.

It must be possible to control and evaluate thenew sales activities separately from all existingactivities.

It is your responsibility to configure a separatesales document types for trade fair sales.

Page 88: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Controlling Business Processes in Sales

HeaderHeader

Item Item

Schedule lineSchedule line

Subsequent Subsequent documentdocument

Sales document type

Sales document type

Item categoryItem category

Schedule line category

Schedule line category

DocumentDocument

Control parameters

Control parameters

Control parameters

Copyingcontrol

Copyingcontrol

Copyingcontrol

Sales processes are controlled by Customizing for sales documents.Customizing for sales documents can be done at header, item or schedule line level, depending on the structure of the document. The instruments for control are the sales document type, item category and schedule line category.You need to make settings in Customizing so that the item and schedule line categories are determined automatically in the sales document.To complete the setup of a business process in your system, you need to configure the system for forwarding data from the sales document to subsequent documents according to your needs. You can do this in copying control.

Page 89: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Basic Functions

Material req. planning

No materials planning

No inventory management

Schedule line categoriesSchedule line categories

Standard item

Free-of-charge item

Text item

Item categoriesItem categories

Sales document typesSales document types

Standard sales order

Inquiry

Quotation

Basic functionsBasic functions

• Partner determination• Pricing• Incompleteness• Free Goods• Determining materials• Requirements transfer• Delivery scheduling• Output• Text determination• Credit management• ...

You need to configure several general sales functions (basic functions) for the sales documents. These include:

Partner determination Pricing Output determinationText determination Material determination Credit managementIncompleteness checks Delivery scheduling etc.You can fine-tune these settings at each level within the sales document.

The sales document is not completely configured until you have processed all of the necessary basic functions.Examples:

For pricing you can set up your own pricing procedure for a sales document type. First you configure the sales document type and pricing procedure separately. Then you assign the procedure to the sales document type.You can also create default output types for each sales document type. To do this, you assign the relevant output determination procedure to the sales document type in Customizing for output.

You can use different functions for different sales document types. For example, pricing but not inventory updates are needed to create an inquiry.

Page 90: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Examples of Sales Document Types

RE = ReturnsCR = Credit memo requestSDF= Subsequent free-of-charge

deliveryDR = Debit memo request

OR = Standard orderRO = Rush orderCS = Cash salesCF = Consignment fill-upDF = Delivery free-of-charge

NMS= Quantity contractSA = Scheduling agreementRC = Rental contractWK1= General value contract

IN = InquiryQT = Quotation

Pre-Sales PhasePre-Sales Phase Outline AgreementsOutline Agreements

Sales PhaseSales Phase ComplaintsComplaints

Different sales document types are delivered with the system to represent the different business processes. These provide you with examples of how to use sales document types.

Page 91: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Functions in the Sales Document Type

Sales Sales document document

typetype

Mandatory reference

Number assignment

Enhancement forcontracts

ChecksDivisionOpen quotations/contractsInfo record

Default valuesDateBilling type/delivery typeBlocks

• Partner determination• Pricing• Incompleteness• Free goods• Determining materials• Output• ...

Assigning basicfunctions

Assigning basicfunctions

In Customizing for the sales document type, you configure the settings that influence the sales process, such as the sales document category, delivery and billing blocks or the document types for subsequent deliveries and billing documents.You can also save default values that appear when you create a document. You can overwrite these values at different levels of the document to match particular procedures, such as the customer's requested delivery date or certain basic requirements for contracts.In addition, you can activate various checks such as messages about open quotations or outline agreements, searches for customer-material info records, or credit limit checks. Note that activating checks can affect system performance.Note:Adding a new sales document type to sales processing is time-consuming because many of the entries in Customizing depend on the sales document type. To avoid any difficulties, you should generate a new sales document type by copying an existing one with similar functions. This document type should be one from the SAP standard system or should already have been tested by your company.When you copy the document type, both the fields and the dependent entries are copied. Once the system has copied the document, it automatically generates a log that you can save for documentation purposes.

Page 92: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Changing the Sales Document Type

Material listing andmaterial exclusionprocedures

Output determinationprocedure

Delivery andtransportationscheduling

Free goodsdeterminationprocedurePartner

determinationprocedure ?NewNewNew

Materialdeterminationprocedure

Document pricingprocedure & Pricing procedureText

determinationprocedure

. . .

You can change the current sales document type during document processing (Overview screen: Sales tab).Example:- You create an inquiry and during processing, decide to change it to a quotation. - You can change a saved Inquiry into a standard order. Before you change the sales document type in the sales document, check that:There are no subsequent documentsThe sales document is not a status-relevant subsequent documentThe document has not been created from a service notification or from a contractThe item category can be changedThe new document does not violate the material listing and exclusion criteriaNote: If you need to change a document that has already been saved, both document types must belong to the same number range.

You can define two alternate document types for each sales document type in Customizing. During this process, the system checks the consistency of a number of Customizing items. For example, the setting in the Item division field must agree for both document types. Calling up F4 (possible entries) for these fields displays only those document types that fulfil the necessary prerequisites.You can find further Information in the release notes of Release 4.5A.

Page 93: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Order Types Permitted for Sales Areas

Sales organization1000 Standard order

Inquiry

Free-of-charge deliveries

Returns

Distribution channel10

Division00

Sales document typesSales document typesSales areaSales area

Permitted?Permitted?

You can use Customizing to define which sales document types are valid in which: Sales organizationsDistribution channelsDivisions

This means you can limit the validity of your sales document types at the level of sales organization, distribution channel and division.

Page 94: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Document Type: Summary

You are now able to:

Identify the elements that control the salesdocuments

Name examples of different sales documenttypes used for different business processes

Explain what the sales document type does Create Customizing settings for the sales

document type Restrict the validity of sales document types to

sales areas

Page 95: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Control sales document types in Customizing

• Implement your own sales processes with new sales document types

You want to control and evaluate your sales activities separately for trade fairs. To do this, you use a different sales document type, which you set up in Customizing to meet your requirements. You limit the use of that sales document type for the sales areas defined.

1-1 Your new trade fair order should meet the following requirements:

• Description: Fair##-order

• The number assignment should be internal – you should not be able to assign numbers externally.

• Item numbering should have an increment of 100.

• Order entry should begin with the Item overview screen.

• Checking open quotations or contracts is not necessary.

• When billing documents are created, the system should re-run pricing.Note: In the standard system, billing type F1 is configured such that pricing is re-run automatically when you create a new billing document.

• Your company wants the default requested delivery date to be automatically proposed with a lead time of 2 days.

• Pricing should be based on the current date.

• The system should automatically propose the current date as the purchase order date.

Change order type ZA##, which has been generated as a copy of the standard order (order type OR) to meet these requirements.

Page 96: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Check your settings by creating an order with the new sales document type ZA## and two items.

1-2-1 You already conduct business in sales area 1000 / 10 / 00 with customer T-S62B##. Enhance the master record such that the customer can also be served through sales area Z000 / Z0 / 00. Use the data from the existing sales area as a copy template.

Orders in the new sales area will be processed by the staff of sales office Z00 and sales group Z0.

1-2-2 Check whether data for your material T-ATB## has been maintained in distribution channel Z000 / Z0.

_________________________________

1-2-3 Your customer T-S62B## orders 10 units of material T-ATB## at a trade fair. Enter a trade fair order (sales document type ZA##) in the defined sales area Z00 / Z0 / 00. The purchase order number is ##LO605-ZA##01.

1-2-4 Check the fields containing the document number of the order, the requested delivery date, the pricing date, the order date, the overview screen, and the item numbering for this order.

2-1 OptionalCompare the two sales document types Standard order and Rush order.

2-1-1 What are the differences between these two types?

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

2-1-2 Change sales document type ZA## so that it is like a Rush order.

Note: Check the settings for immediate delivery; shipping conditions and lead time in days.

2-1-3 Create an order with order type ZA## in sales area 1000 / 10 / 00 for customer T-S62A## and your material T-ATA## (10 units). The purchase order number is ##LO605-ZA##03.

Page 97: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

2-1-4 View the document flow to determine whether the delivery was created.

Outbound Delivery number: _________________________________

2-1-5 Undo your changes to order type ZA## when you are finished!

Page 98: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types

1-1 Change sales document type ZA##.

Tools Accelerated SAP Customizing Project editing SAP Reference IMG Sales and Distribution Sales Sales documents Sales document header

Define sales document types

Select document type ZA##. Choose Details.

Description: Fair##-orderNumber range external assignment: BlankItem number increment: 100FCODE for overview screen: UER2 Quotation messages: Blank Outline agreement messages: BlankDelivery-related billing type: F1Order-related billing type: F1Lead time in days: 2Proposed pricing date: BlankProposed purchase order date: Activate

Page 99: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Verify the settings in the sales order.

1-2-1 Enhance the customer master record.

Logistics Sales and Distribution Master data Business partners Customer Create Sales and DistributionCustomer: T-S62B##Sales area: Z000/Z0/00Reference:Customer: T-S62B##Sales area: 1000 / 10 / 00

Tab: Orders Sales office: Z00Sales group: Z0

Tab: Billing documentTax classification: 1

1-2-2 The data has been maintained.

Logistics Sales and Distribution Master data Products Material Trading goods DisplayChoose Sales: Sales Org Data 1 and then Organizational levels.

Sales organization: Z000Distribution channel: Z0

1-2-3 Create the sales order.

1-2-4 Check the Customizing of your sales document type ZA##.

Fair##-order: Blank (Number is assigned internally when you save)Requested delivery date: Two days from today Pricing date: TodayPurchase order date: TodayOverview screen: Item overviewItem number: 100

Page 100: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

2-1 Compare the document types in Customizing.

Sales and Distribution Sales Sales documents Sales document header

Define sales document types

2-1-1 The following fields in the rush order are different from those in the standard order (Note: these are the critical fields that are different – there are others):

Imm. delivery:ActivatedShipping condition: 10 immediately Lead time in days: Blank

2-1-2 Change the document type.

2-1-3 Create the order and save.

2-1-4 Display the order and choose Document flow.

2-1-5 Undo the changes to the document type.

Imm. delivery: BlankShipping condition: BlankLead time in days: 2

Page 101: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Controlling Sales Documents with the ItemCategory

Item categories in the sales document

Functions of the item category

Controlling sales document items

Determining the item category automatically in salesdocuments

Using item categories to control bills of material in salesdocuments

Unit Contents:

Page 102: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Item Category: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Identify and explain the important controlparameters for item categories

Create a new item category

Configure the system so that item categories areautomatically assigned to a sales document type

Control settings for bills of material in the salesdocument

Page 103: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Item Category: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0.00 ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special businesstransactions

9. Incomp-leteness

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales order processing

10. Partnerdetermination

Page 104: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Item Category: Business Scenario

Company management has now decided to expandthe company's sales activities.

In future, you want to use BOMs to sell certainproducts. In addition, customers should also beable to place orders at trade fairs.

To control these processes separately, you want tobe able to influence document control at the itemlevel.

Page 105: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Examples of Item Categories

REN = Standard item in returns

G2TX= Text item in credit memo request

KLN = Free-of-charge item

TAD = Service in standard order

BVNN= Free-of-charge item in cash sales

KEN = Standard item in consignment issue

KMN = Standard item in quantity contract

WVN = Standard item inmaintenance contract

WKN = Item in value contract

AFN = Standard item in InquiryAGTX= Text item in quotation

Pre-Sales PhasePre-Sales Phase Outline AgreementsOutline Agreements

Sales PhaseSales Phase ComplaintsComplaints

Different item categories are delivered with the system to support the different business processes. You can use them as examples or as templates for creating your own item categories.The item category is defined with a four-digit key. These keys are copied automatically from the original German keys and are not translated. The first two characters provide a clue to the sales document type that was originally designed for these item categories. The last two characters indicate the use of the item category, such as:AFTX Sales document type: IN Usage: TEXTTAD Sales document type: OR Item category group: LEISKMN Sales document type: NMS Item category group: NORM

You can decide if you would like to keep the standard keys or define your own so that the abbreviation refers to your sales document types and how the category is configured.

Page 106: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Item Category Functions

Item categoryItem category

Separatebusiness data

Schedule lines permitted

Billing relevance

Delivery relevance

Pricing

Assigning basicfunctions

Assigning basicfunctions

• Partner determination• Text determination• Incompleteness• . . .

Completion rule

BOMs

The item category controls what the item does in the sales document and in any later processing for that business transaction.The essential characteristics of an item category decide:Whether business data in the item can be different to that of the document headerWhether pricing applies to the itemWhether and how an item is billedWhether the item refers to an item or whether it is just a text itemWhich incompleteness log is used to check the item data

You can change the settings for the item categories defined in the standard system. You can also define new item categories. To do this, you should always copy item categories that already exist and have been tested, then change them to meet your requirements.The delivery relevance indicator is only for items without schedule lines. You could indicate that a text item was relevant to delivery, for example, so that the system copies this item from the sales order into the delivery document.

Page 107: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Controlling the Items in the Sales Document

Standard item inquotation

Standard item inquotation

Standard item inorder

Standard item inorder

Free-of-charge item in order

Free-of-charge item in order

PricingSchedule lines allowedNot relevant for billing

AGN

TAN

TANN

Pricing Schedule lines allowed Relevant for billing

No pricingSchedule lines allowedNot relevant for billing

Text item forinquiry

Text item forinquiry AFTX

No pricingSchedule lines allowedNot relevant for billing

Function Example

The diagram contains examples with settings as they are provided in the standard R/3 System.Every item in a sales document is controlled through its item category. This enables you toUse different item categories in different sales document types,Realize different business processes for each item in the sales document.

You can configure the functions of the item categories according to your requirements. For example:You do not need price determination for the text item in the inquiry (item category AFTX), but you want to enter delivery quantities and delivery dates, and you therefore allow schedule lines. You want schedule lines for a free-of-charge item in the sales order (item category TANN) but you do not want to carry out pricing for this item or transfer it to billing.

Page 108: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sub-Items

Item 30

Item 20 Higher item 10

Item 10

HeaderExamples ofsub-items

Order

Free goods

BOM components

Service

You can assign an item to a higher-level item if, for example, a customer receives free goods for ordering a certain quantity of your product.Example:

Item 10: M1 100 units 1000 UNIItem 20: M2 10 units Free of chargeFor ordering 100 pieces of item 10, the customer receives 10 units free of charge. To display this, you enter item 10 in the higher-level item field for item 20.

This simple form of supplying free goods is supplemented with the automatic determination of free goods (see the unit "Free goods").Other examples for using sub-items include the explosion of BOMs or service items in sales documents.Note:Alternative items can also be recorded in quotations and Inquiries in addition to sub-items. Alternative items are treated differently from sub-items; for example, alternative items are not included in the net value of the document.

Page 109: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Assignment: Item Category to Sales DocumentType

System proposal Alternatives

Item category groupItem category group

Sales document typeSales document type

Item category of upper-level itemItem category of upper-level item

Item category(ies)Item category(ies)

Item usageItem usage

Material masterView:

Sales: Sales org. 2

ABAP/4 EditorABAP/4 Editor

form XY_001. sy-subrc = 4. check: FeldX ne FeldY. sy-subrc = 0.endform.ProgramProgram

Sales document

Item

Sales document

Header

Item categories are assigned to sales document types.The purpose of this assignment is to:Configure the system to propose an item category when you create an orderDefine alternative item categories to the system proposal

This assignment is influenced by:The item category group from the material master record. The item category group allows you to group different materials that behave in a similar way during Sales and Distribution processes, for example. You can also define new item category groups if needed.Item usage, which in certain cases is set internally in the program.The system uses TEXT if the user enters an item in the inquiry or quotation by entering data in the "Description" field without specifying a material number. FREE is used for controlling the free goods item.Item category of a higher-level item (in the case of a sub-item)

Page 110: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

BOMs: Example: Computer

Monitor CPU KeyboardMouse Floppy drive

Screen

Computer

Casing

A computer consists of several components. In turn, each of these components is constructed from several individual parts.You can store this structure in the system as a bill of material. All the items in the bill of material (BOM) that you want to control in the sales document must be flagged as relevant for sales. (Please note: the items in a bill of material are controlled differently than the item categories in a sales document). If you create a BOM material with BOM usage 5 (SD), all the items in the bill of material will be automatically flagged as relevant to sales.By making the appropriate settings in Customizing for the item categories in the sales document, you can copy the components in the bill of material to a sales order. To process the sales document you only need to enter the material number of the BOM. The BOM appears in the sales document as a structure with main and sub-items. The system explodes the BOMs in the sales order by automatically generating sub-items for the components.

Page 111: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Exploding Bills of Material in Sales Documents

Item category ofsub-item: Not priced

TAQ

TAE

Material master:R-1001

Sales: Sales org. 2

Item category group: ERLA

Material master:R-1001

Item category group: LUMFSales: Sales org. 2

Alternative control of BOM

Sales documentItem category ofmain item: Pricing

Item category ofsub-item: Pricing

Sales documentItem category ofmain item: Not priced

TAP

TAN

The individual item categories control what a bill of material can do in a sales document. In Customizing you define and assign item categories for the main and sub-items in the BOM in the sales document.A specific item category group assigned to the material master record of the main item defines which item categories are assigned to the main item. To determine how far the BOM should be exploded in the sales document, you need to define the extent of the structure of the item category for the main item.When you determine the sub-items, the system also needs to know the item category of the higher-level item.In Customizing for item categories, you control which item are relevant to pricing and how you want to implement requirements transfer.

Page 112: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category

Topic: Item Categories and Item Category Determination

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Configure the Customizing of item categories

• Explain and control the automatic determination of item categories.

Items in sales documents frequently have to be controlled differently, such as for pricing or billing.

This applies to items

• That pass through several sales documents during the course of the transaction

• Within an individual sales document

Item categories are determined automatically.

1-1 Your customer tells you that she would like to add to her purchase order number ##LO605-TA05.

1-1-1 Enter another item with 16 units of material T-ATE##. The delivery date is in two week’s time.

1-1-2 You have also agreed to give your customer a free goods item of 1 unit of material T-ATE##. Enter the corresponding sub-item.

1-1-3 Is this item included in the net value of the order?

____________________________________

1-1-4 What are the item categories in this order?

Item 10: _________________________________

Item 20: _________________________________

Item 30: _________________________________

Page 113: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Complete the following table:

Item category

Description Business

data

Schedule lines

permitted

Item relev. for

delivery

Pricing Structure scope

TAN Standard itemTANN Free-of-charge

itemTAP Extent deliveredTAQ Extent deliveredTATX Text itemTAD ServiceTAE Not priced

1-3 Why is the item category in the order automatically proposed by the system? Look for the relevant table in Customizing. What are the key fields for automatically determining the item categories?

1st key field: _________________________________

2nd key field: _________________________________

3rd key field: _________________________________

4th key field: _________________________________

1-4 Complete the following table:

Sales document

type

Item category

group

Item usage

Higher-level item category

Default item category

Manual item category

Manual item category

IN DIEN

OR TEXT

OR NORM

OR NORM TAN

OR NORM TAP

OR NORM TAQ

ZA## ERLA

ZA## ERLA TAQ

ZA## LUMF

ZA## LUMF TAP

Page 114: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-5 Optional Your customer T-S62A## places a standard order with purchase order number ##LO605-OR06 in sales area 1000 / 10 / 00.

1-5-1 Enter the standard order with a requested delivery date of one week from today. Enter the following positions:

Material: T-ATA## (5 units)Material: T-ZSA## (3 hours)

Which item category groups are assigned to the materials?

Item 10: _________________________________ Item 20: _________________________________

1-5-2 Which item categories are used? In Customizing, check which of the item categories are relevant for delivery and pricing.

Item category

Pricing Sched. line allowed

Item relev. for delivery

Item 10

Item 20

1-5-3 Deliver the order with purchase order number ##LO605-OR06. Delivery items are generated for which order items?

_________________________________

Page 115: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category

Topic: Bills of Material (BOMs) in the Sales Document

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Create master records for sales BOMs

• Control BOMs in sales documents

You often have to explode BOMs in sales documents. In the process, you have to determine, for example, at which level price determination and/or transfer of requirements is performed.

2-1 You want your material T-FUA## in plant: 1200 to appear as a bill of material in your sales documents.

2-1-1 Create a sales bill of material (usage: 5 Sales) for this material with components T-ATA##, T-ATF## and T-ATG## (one unit each). Configure the bill of material items as stock items (L).

2-1-2 Create an order for your customer T-S62A## and your material T-FUA## (10 units). The purchase order number is ##LO605-OR07. Does the system explode the bill of material?

____________________________________________________________

Why or why not?

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

Page 116: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

2-1-3 In future, you only want to determine the prices for the finished product. You want to list the individual components of the finished product for informational purposes. Change the material master for your material T-FUA## so that pricing only takes place at the main item level.

2-1-4 Check the effects of your change in the sales document by creating a new order for customer T-S62A## ordering material T-FUA## (10 units). Does the system explode the bill of material? Which items affect the net value of the order?

PO number: ##LO605-TA08

2-1-5 Change your material T-FUA## so that pricing only takes place at the sub-item level.

2-1-6 Check the effects of your change in the sales document by creating a new order for customer T-S62A## ordering material T-FUA## (10 units). Does the system explode the bill of material?Which items affect the net value of the order?

PO number: ##LO605-TA09

Page 117: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category

Topic: Item Categories and Item Category Determination

1-1 Add to the order with purchase order number ##LO605-TA05.

1-1-1 Material: T-ATE## (16 units)Delivery date: Two weeks from today

1-1-2 Enter the sub-item.

Material: T-ATE## (1 unit) Higher-level item: 20

1-1-3 Is this item included in the net value of the order?

Select the free goods item and choose Item conditions.

No. The net value of the item is zero.

1-1-4 Determine the item categories.

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Order Display

Item 10: TANItem 20: TANItem 30: TANN

Page 118: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Check the definitions of the respective item categories.

IMG Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Item Define item categories

Item category

Description Business

data

Schedule lines

permitted

Item relev. for delivery

Pricing Structure scope

TAN Standard item x x - X -

TANN Free-of-charge item

x x - B -

TAP Extent delivered - x - - A

TAQ Extent delivered x x X A

TATX Text item - - x - -

TAD Service x x - X -

TAE Not priced - x - - -

1-3 Check the assignment of the respective item categories.

IMG Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Item Assign item categories

1st key field: SaTu Sales document type2nd key field: ItCGr Item category group3rd key field: Usage Item usage4th key field: HlevItCa Item category of

higher-level item

Page 119: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-4Sales

document type

Item category

group

Item usage

Higher-level item category

Default item category

Manual item category

Manual item category

IN DIEN AFXOR TEXT AGTXOR NORM TAN TAP TAQOR NORM TAN TANNOR NORM TAP TANOR NORM TAQ TAE

ZA## ERLA TAQZA## ERLA TAQ TAEZA## LUMF TAPZA## LUMF TAP TAN

1-5 Create the sales order.

1-5-1 Navigate from the order to the material master record Environment Display material, and then select tab page “Sales” in the material master: SalesOrg2,

Item 10: Item category group: NORMItem 20: Item category group: LEIS

1-5-2Item

categoryPricing Sched. line

allowedItem relev. for delivery

Item 10 TAN X X -

Item 20 TAD X X -

1-5-3 A delivery item is generated for the standard item.

Page 120: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category

Topic: Bills of Material (BOMs) in the Sales Document

2-1 Enter and work with a bill of material.

2-1-1 Enter the bill of material into an order.

Logistics Sales and Distribution Master data Products Bill of material Bill of material Material BOM Create

Plant: 1200 DresdenBOM usage: 5 Sales and DistributionBOM item category: L Stock item

2-1-2 Enter the bill of material into an order.

The BOM is not exploded.

IMG Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Item Define item categories

The item category of the main item in the BOM, TAN, does not support the explosion of BOMs in the sales document (the ”Structure scope” field is blank).

2-1-3 Change the item category group in the material master of the main item in the BOM.

Logistics Sales and Distribution Master data Products Material Trading goods Change

Choose Sales: Sales org. data 2Sales organization: 1000Distribution channel: 10Item category group: ERLA

Page 121: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

2-1-4 Create an order.

The BOM is exploded. Pricing is only performed for the main item, as a result, the net value of the order is calculated exclusively from this item.

2-1-5 Change the item category group in the material master of the main item in the BOM.

Logistics Sales and Distribution Master data Products Material Trading goods Change

Choose Sales: Sales org. data 2Sales organization: 1000Distribution channel: 10Item category group: LUMF

2-1-6 Create an order.

The BOM is exploded. Pricing is only performed for the sub-item, as a result, the net value of the order is calculated exclusively from the sub-items.

Page 122: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Controlling Sales Documents with Schedule LineCategories

Schedule line categories in sales documents

Functions of schedule line category

Controlling the schedule line category

Automatically determining the schedule line category

Unit Contents:

Page 123: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Schedule Line Category: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Identify and explain the most important controlparameters for schedule line categories

Create a new schedule line category

Configure your settings so that schedule linecategories are automatically assigned to eachsales document item

Page 124: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Schedule line category: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0,-- ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special Business Transactions

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

Page 125: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Schedule Line Category: Business Scenario

Changes that affect the entire logistics process aretaking place at your company, IDES AG.

One of the interfaces to the other logistics modulesrepresents the schedule lines of the salesdocuments.

As a result, you have to find out about the controlparameters and the automatic determination of theschedule line categories.

Page 126: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Examples of Schedule Line Categories

DN = Schedule line in returns without MRP

D0 = Consignment returns

CP = Order schedule line with MRP

C0 = Consignment issuewithout availabilitycheck

CV = Scheduling agreement with deterministic MRP

AT = Inquiry schedule lineBN = Schedule line in quotation

without MRP

Pre-Sales PhasePre-Sales Phase Outline AgreementsOutline Agreements

Sales PhaseSales Phase ComplaintsComplaints

Different schedule line categories are delivered with the system to provide different control options for the items throughout the sales process. You can use them as is or as templates for creating your own schedule line categories.The schedule line category is defined with a two-character key. The standard system already includes keys that often indicate the usage of the schedule line category.

The first character indicates the sales process in which the schedule line category is used.A = Inquiry B = QuotationC = Order D = ReturnsThe second character in the key indicates what happens to the schedule line within logistics.T = No inventory management X = No inventory management with goods issueN = No materials planning P = Material requirements planningV = Consumption-based planning

You can decide if you would like to keep the standard keys or define your own so that the abbreviation refers to your sales document types and how the category is configured.

Page 127: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Schedule Line Category

Delivery relevance

Purchasing

Requirements transfer

Goods movement

Availability check

Schedule line Schedule line categorycategory • Incompleteness

• . . .

Assigning basicfunctions

Assigning basicfunctions

Schedule lines contain delivery dates and quantities as well as information about the requirements transfer and inventory management. They are a prerequisite for delivering materials. In Customizing for item categories, you decide if you will allow schedule lines for the item. You can assign schedule line categories to each item category. By defining a schedule line category, you determine which schedule lines are actually relevant for delivery. You must activate the relevant to delivery indicator if you want the goods to be physically delivered. In the schedule line category you set the movement type to control which changes to quantities and values are posted to inventory accounting. Inventory management is responsible for maintaining the movement types. Movement types have been configured for all processes in the SAP standard system. Many of the movement types relevant to SD are between 601 and 699.You can deactivate requirements transfer and availability checks at the schedule line level.A prerequisite for the purchase order is typically a purchase requisition and this document can be automatically generated from the sales document. To do this, you need to configure the purchase order type as well as item and account assignment categories in the purchase order.If you activate a delivery block in the schedule line category, this block is automatically set at the schedule line level in the sales document.

Page 128: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Controlling Schedule Lines in Sales Documents

BN

CP

DN

Not rel. for deliveryNo requirements trans.No movement type

Relevant for deliveryRequirements transferMovement type 601

Relevant for deliveryNo requirements trans.Movement type 651

Function Example

Schedule line inSchedule line inquotationquotation

Requirements planningRequirements planningin orderin order

Schedule line inSchedule line inreturnsreturns

Examples in the R/3 standard system.Schedule lines in quotations are not relevant for delivery. The requirements transfer is inactive in the schedule line category. Goods movements are not necessary in your warehouses so no movement type is needed..Since schedule lines from category CP generate delivery items in the sales order, the relevant to delivery indicator is activated. The requirements transfer is active in the schedule line category. Complete Customizing for requirements transfer (for example, for requirements planning) requires you to define and assign the requirements class. The goods movement is controlled by movement type 601. With this movement type, when the goods issue for the delivery is posted, the quantity shipped is taken from unrestricted use stocks.If you want a returns delivery to follow a return order, you need a schedule line category that is relevant for delivery. In this case, transferring requirements is not necessary. Movement type 651 enables you to make sure that goods receipt goes to blocked stock returns.

Page 129: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Assignment: Schedule Line Category to ItemCategory

System proposal Alternatives

Material master

View: MRP 1

Sales documentItem

Item Item categoryItem category

MRP typeMRP type

Schedule lineSchedule linecategory(ies)category(ies)

Schedule line categories are assigned to item categories.The purpose of this assignment is to:Configure the system to propose a schedule line category automatically when you create an orderDetermine the schedule line categories that the user can choose instead of the system proposal

The assignment is influenced by the materials requirements planning (MRP) type in the material master record. The system takes two steps to automatically determine the schedule line category:First it tries to determine the schedule line category using the key combination of item category and MRP type. If no schedule line category is found, the system searches for the key combination of item category / no MRP type.

Page 130: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Schedule line category: Summary

You are now able to:

Identify and explain the most important controlparameters for schedule line categories

Create a new schedule line category

Configure your settings so that schedule linecategories are automatically assigned to each salesdocument item

Page 131: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Lines

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Configure the Customizing of schedule line categories

• Explain and control the automatic determination of schedule line categories

The schedule lines contain delivery quantities and dates for a sales document item. Later on in the business process, a schedule line can either create an item in a delivery or it can transfer the data to a subsequent sales document. You use the schedule line category to decide, for example, whether the system should check availability or transfer requirements for that schedule line.

1-1 Customer T-S62A## requests a quotation for 10 units of material T-ATA##.

1-1-1 Enter the quotation with purchase order number ##LO605-OT02. The quotation should be valid for a month.

1-1-2 On what date has the delivery of the schedule line been confirmed?

Confirmed date: _________________________________

1-1-3 Which item and schedule line categories have been determined?

Item category: _________________________________

Schedule line category: _________________________________

Page 132: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-4 How does the schedule line category control this schedule line?

Item relev. for delivery _________________________________

Requirements transfer: _________________________________

Availability check: _________________________________

1-1-5 Try to deliver the quotation (change the delivery selection date to the schedule line confirmed date). Can you do it?

____________________________________________________________

1-2 Complete the following table:

Schedule line cat.

Description Availability Transfer of requirements

Item relev. for delivery

Movement type

AT Inquiry schedule line

BN No MRP

BP Deterministic MRP

CN No MRP

CP Deterministic MRP

DN Returns

1-3 After a comprehensive check of your quotation, customer T-S62A## places an order with you.

1-3-1 Enter a standard order with reference to the quotation created in previous exercise (order will use purchase order number ##LO605-OR10). Copy the quotation completely into the order.

1-3-2 On what date has the delivery of the schedule line been confirmed?

Confirmed date: _________________________________

1-3-3 Which item and schedule line categories have been determined?

Item category: _________________________________

Schedule line category: _________________________________

Page 133: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3-4 How does the schedule line category control this schedule line?

Item relev. for delivery _________________________________

Movement type: _________________________________

Requirements transfer: _________________________________

Availability check: _________________________________

1-3-5 Try to deliver the order. Can you do it?

____________________________________________________________

1-3-6 Optional Which order screens contain information about the movement type and delivery blocks linked to schedule lines?

Movement type: _________________________________

Delivery block: _________________________________

1-4 Complete the following table:

Item category

MRP type Proposed schedule line

category

Manual schedule line

category

Manual schedule line

category

ItCa Typ SchLD MSLCa MSLCa

AFN

AFN ND

AGN

TAN

TAN VM

TANN ND

REN

KBN

KEN

Page 134: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-5 Optional Which schedule line category does the system determine for an item in item category TAN if the MRP type for the material is P3 (MRP fixing type -3-)?

Schedule line category: _________________________________

Which search key does the system use?

Key: _________________________________

Page 135: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Lines

1-1 Create the quotation

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Quotation Create

1-1-1 Quotation type: QT PO number: ##LO605-AG02 Valid to: one month from today

1-1-2 Select the item and choose Schedule lines for item.

1-1-3 Item category: AGN Standard itemSchedule line category: CS Verbrg. MRP

1-1-4 Navigate to the definition of the schedule line category.

IMG → Sales and distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Define schedule line categories

Item relev. for delivery deactivatedReq./Assembly deactivatedAvailability check deactivated

1-1-5 No.The schedule lines of the quotation are not relevant for delivery.

Page 136: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Check the definition of the schedule line categories.

IMG → Sales and distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Define schedule line categories

Schedule line cat.

Description Availability Transfer of requirements

Item relev. for delivery

Movement type

AT Inquiry schedule line - - - -

BN No MRP - - - -

BP Deterministic MRP x x - -

CN No MRP - - x 601

CP Deterministic MRP x x x 601

DN Returns - - x 651

1-3 Create the sales order.

1-3-1 Choose Create with reference and enter the number of the quotation.

1-3-2 Select the item and choose Schedule lines for item.

1-3-3 Item category: TANSchedule line category: CV

1-3-4 Item rel. for del. xMovement type 601 GD goods issue: deliveryReq./Assembly xAvailability check x

1-3-5 Call the order and choose Sales document Deliver.

Yes.

1-3-6 OptionalSelect the item and choose Schedule lines for item.Select the item again and choose Schedule line details or press the Procurement or Shipping pushbutton.

The movement type is located on the Procurement tab page.

The delivery block is located on the Shipping tab page.

Page 137: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-4 Check the assignment of the schedule line categories.

IMG → Sales and distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Assign schedule line categories

Item category MRP type Proposed schedule line

category

Manual schedule line

category

Manual schedule line

category

ItCa Typ SchLD MSLCa MSLCa

AFN AT BP

AFN ND ATAGN BN BP

TAN CP

TAN VM CV

TANN ND CN

REN DN

KBN E1 E0

KEN C1 C0

1-5 Optional

Schedule line category: CPKey: Item category: TAN

MRP type: Blank

No explicit entries are maintained for the item category and the MRP type in the assignment table.

In this case, the system checks whether an entry without a definition of the MRP type exists for the involved item category.

Page 138: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Data flow

Create with reference

Document flow

Copying control and copying requirements

Updating the reference status

Unit Contents:

Page 139: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Data Flow: Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Use the document flow

Understand and influence how data is passedbetween sales documents at header, item andschedule line level

Use the completion rule for item categories tocontrol documents created with reference

Page 140: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Data Flow: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0,-- ORORLFLFF2F2

8. Special Business Transactions

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

7. Data flow

Page 141: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Data Flow: Business Scenario

The different sales processes at your company,IDES AG, need to differentiate how they copy datafrom a preceding document to a subsequentdocument

The status information in the preceding documentalso has to be controlled differently, dependent onthe process

You need to model the processes as documentflow lists

It is your responsibility to figure out how thedocument flow, copying control, and status updatework

Page 142: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Create with Reference: Dialog

Create with reference X

Copy

Inquiry Billing documentOrder ContractQuotation Sched.agt

Quotation

Req. delivery date

PO number

Sold-to party

Search

Item selection

200000546

Search criteria

You can create a sales document with reference to a preceeding document from both the initial screen and during documen processing; the process is controlled using a uniform dialog box.The dialog box contains the six tab pages for Inquiry‚ Quotation, Order, Contract, Scheduling agreement and Billing document, from which you can choose one. The default tab card that appears when you first call up the screen has been determined by the system depending on the sales document category and the Mandatory reference field. The system then determines the document number of the required reference document.When you choose Copy, the system copies the reference document completely and if you choose Item selection you can select certain items and change the quantities before they are copied (see next slides).

Page 143: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Create with Reference: Item Selection (1)

Item102030

MaterialM1M2M3

Quant.4050

100

Deadline04/0104/0104/01

Price100.-150.-120.-

SD document: 5376Sold-to party: 1000Business data

Page 144: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Create with Reference: Item Selection (2)

Item10 20 30

MaterialM1M2M3

Quantity4050

100

X

X60

Copying control

Selection list of reference doc.SD document: 5376Sold-to party: 1000Business dataCreate with reference

Document 5376

Copy Selection list

Dialog

Item102030

MaterialM1M2M3

Quant.4050

100

Deadline04/0104/0104/01

Price100.-150.-120.-

SD document: 5376Sold-to party: 1000Business data

Page 145: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Create with Reference: Item Selection (3)

Item10 20 30

MaterialM1M2M3

Quantity4050

100

X

X60

SD document: 5435Sold-to party: 1000Business data

Item 1020

MaterialM1M3

Quant.4060

Deadline06/2006/20

Price100.-120.-

Copying control

Selection list of reference doc.SD document: 5376Sold-to party: 1000Business dataCreate with reference

Document 5376

Copy Selection list

Dialog

Item102030

MaterialM1M2M3

Quant.4050

100

Deadline04/0104/0104/01

Price100.-150.-120.-

SD document: 5376Sold-to party: 1000Business data

You can create sales documents with reference to documents that already exist.In the process, you can specify a different requested delivery date for the new document. This date is set at the header level and for all referenced items in the new document.You can use the Selection list button to select one or more items in the referenced document and change the order quantities according to your customer's requirements. This allows you to copy partial quantities or all the items and quantities in the referenced document directly to the new one. Alternatively, you can also copy all the items and quantities directly from the preceding document.You can create with reference from both the initial screen and during document entry. This allows you to group several quotations for a customer together in a single order.You can create with reference for inquiries, quotations, sales orders, contracts, scheduling agreements and billing documents. To create with reference, you must first configure the corresponding copying controls. Please note that you should only configure these controls for logical business processes.Example: A free-of-charge subsequent delivery based on a sales order is appropriate

An order based on a free-of-charge subsequent delivery is not appropriate

Page 146: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Create with Reference: Copy

Item102030

MaterialM1M2M3

Quant.4050

100

Deadline04/0104/0104/01

Price100.-150.-120.-

SD document: Sold-to party: 1000Business data

Create with referenceDocument 5376

Copy Selection list

Dialog

Item102030

MaterialM1M2M3

Quant.4050

100

Deadline04/0104/0104/01

Price100.-150.-120.-

SD document: 5376Sold-to party: 1000Business data

When you create with reference using the "Copy" pushbutton in the dialog box, the full quantities of all items are copied to the subsequent document. This does not apply to items in the reference document that have been partially or fully completed.

Page 147: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Completion Rule and Reference Status

Inquiry

Item10

MaterialM1

Quantity10

Status: Fully referenced

Sold-to party: C1

Quotation

Item10

MaterialM1

Quantity8

Status: Partially ref.

Sold-to party: C1

Order

Item10

MaterialM1

Quantity6

Sold-to party: C1

Copying control:Update doc. flow x

Copying control:Update doc. flow x

Item category

AFNCompletion rule AItem complete afterfirst reference

AFNCompletion rule AItem complete afterfirst reference

AGNCompletion rule BItem complete whenfull quantity is ref.

AGNCompletion rule BItem complete whenfull quantity is ref.

TAN

When you Create with reference to preceding documents, you frequently have to update the information about referred quantities or values. To do this, you have to check the Document flow update field at item level in copying control.In addition, if you want to restrict the reference to an item (for example, only until the full quantity in the preceding document has been referenced), set the appropriate Completion rule in the item category. The status of each item in the preceding document is updated separately, depending on the completion rule of the item category.ExamplesCompletion rule A:An inquiry item is given "Completed" status as soon as it has been referred to in a quotation. This applies even if only part of the quantity in the quotation is copied.Completion rule B:A quotation item is not given "Completed" status until the complete quantity has been copied to the subsequent order. If only some of the quantity is copied, the quotation item is given the status "Partially referred". This allows you to continue creating orders from this item until the total quantity has been used up. There are no additional completion rules for items in contracts.

If you enter a reason for rejection, the item receives "Completed" status.

Page 148: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Document Flow - List

Document flow of quotation

Quotation. Order. . Delivery. . . Invoice. . Returns. . . Returns delivery. . . . Returns credit memo

Returns

Order Delivery Invoice

Returnsdelivery

Returns credit memo

Quotation

...

A sales process is made up of the sequence of individual process steps recorded as documents. This process chain is stored in the document flow.Document flows are updated for the overall document and for individual items. You can view all of the documents within the document flow in a list. In many cases, you can branch directly to the display of a document and then return to the document flow.In the status overview that can be displayed for each document in the document flow, you can quickly find detailed information about the current status of the sales and distribution process.Example:Order -> Delivery statusDelivery -> Picking status

-> Billing statusBilling doc. -> Posting status

Page 149: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Copying Control in SD

Quotation (QT)

Standard order (OR)

Delivery (LF)

Billing document (F2)

allowed

allowed

allowed

In copying control you determine which document types can be copied to another document type. Examples of this show how you can create a:Sales document type from a sales doc. type e.g. Standard order (OR) <- quotation (QT)Sales document type from a billing doc. type e.g. Credit memo request (G2) <- invoice (F2)Delivery type from a sales document type e.g. Delivery (DL) <- Standard order (OR)Billing doc. type from a sales doc. type e.g. Credit memo (G2) <- Credit memo request (G2)Billing document type from a delivery type e.g. Invoice (F1) <- Delivery (DF)Billing doc. type from a billing doc. type e.g. Invoice cancellation (S1) <- invoice (F1)

You determine the details of the copying procedure in copying control.

Page 150: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Copying Control for Sales Documents

SourceSource

Sched. line

Item

HeaderIN Inquiry

QT Quotation

Sales doc. type

for INQT

for INQT

AFN Standard item

AFNN FOC item

Item category

AT Inquiry sched. lineBP Materials planning

Schedule line cat.

TargetTarget

QT Quotation

OR Std. order

Sales doc. type

AGN Standard item

AGNN FOC item

Item category

Schedule line cat.

You set up copying control for header, item and schedule line level to match the structure of your sales document. To control the copying procedure, at each level you create:Data transfer routinesThese routines control how fields are copied from the reference document.Copying requirements Here you define requirements that are checked when you create a document with reference. If these requirements are not met in a particular case, the system issues a warning or error message and if necessary, terminates processing.SwitchesThere are switches for setting specific controls for each transaction. For example, you can activate or deactivate the transfer of item numbers from the preceding document at the header level for sales documents.

If you enter an invalid value or do not enter a target value at the item and schedule line level, the system determines the target from the assignment of the item or schedule line categories. Any value you enter must exist in the item or schedule line category assignment (as an alternative).

Page 151: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Copying Requirements

General dataHeader business dataPartner

Schedule line data

Quotation Standard order

General dataHeader business dataPartner

General item dataItem business dataPartnerConditions

Schedule line data

If customer is

the same

If item is not

completed(completely copied

or rejected)

if open quantity

is greater than zero

General item dataItem business dataPartnerConditions

You can store copying requirements at every level in copying control. Copying requirements contain the specific requirements for each business process and can be stored at every level. The reference document can only be created if all these requirements have been met.Examples of copying requirements that have been included in the SAP standard system are:Header levelCopying requirement 001 checks, for instance, whether the sold-to party and the sales area in the source and target document are the same.Item levelCopying requirement 301 checks, for instance, whether the item that is to be used as a copy has a reason for rejection or status Completed.Schedule line levelCopying requirement 501 ensures that only schedule lines with an open quantity greater than zero are copied.

Note:Routines and requirements are written in ABAP/4 code and can be processed in Customizing in SD under System Modifications. Here you should check whether the existing objects are suitable. Normally you can adjust your system quickly by copying the objects in the standard system and deleting or adding lines of code to them.

Page 152: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Data Flow: Summary

You are now able to:

Use document flow

Understand and influence how data is passed onbetween sales documents at header, item andschedule line level

Use the completion rule for item categories tocontrol documents with reference

Page 153: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Unit: Data Flow

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Control how the completion status is updated between documents

• Track the data transfer between sales documents and adapt it to meet the specific requirements of a business process

In each step within a business process, you formulate requirements that become prerequisites for the next step.

For example, you can define that a quotation can only lead to an order when

• the sold-to party is identical in both documents or when

• the customer’s order lies within the validity period of the quotation

1-1 You receive a request for quotation (Inquiry number ##LO605-IN02) from customer T-S62A##. The customer requests 50 units each of materials T-ATA## and T-ATB##. The requested delivery date is the first day of the next month.

1-1-1 Enter the inquiry.

1-1-2 What is the status of the items in the inquiry?

Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Header

Item 10

Item 20

1-1-3 After checking with your MRP controller, you know that you can offer the customer the requested quantity for material T-ATA##, but only 30 units of material T-ATB##. Enter a corresponding quotation (purchase number ##LO605-OT03) with reference to the inquiry. The quotation is valid for a month.

Page 154: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-4 Which changes does the system make to the document status?

Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Inquiry

Header

Item 10

Item 20

Quotation

Header

Item 10

Item 20

1-1-5 Once your customer has checked the quotation, they order the first item with the complete quantity in the quotation, but initially only orders 20 units of the second item. Create the trade fair## order (purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##04).

1-1-6 Which changes are made to the status of the quotation?

Item Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Header

Item 10

Item 20

1-1-7 Your customer then informs you that they don’t want the open quantity of item 20 in the quotation because the product is too expensive. Reject the item in the quotation and check the changes to the status.

Reason for rejection: _________________________________

Item Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Header

Item 20

Page 155: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Try to create another order with reference to the quotation.

1-2-1 Can you do it?

____________________________________________________________

Why or why not?

____________________________________________________________

1-3 Optional You decide in copying control whether the item numbers for the subsequent document should be copied from the preceding document.

1-3-1 Was the item numbering in the trade fair## order (purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##04) recalculated or taken from the quotation?

____________________________________________________________

1-3-2 Item numbering should be re-determined when you create an order for order type ZA## with reference to a quotation. Change the settings in copying control accordingly.

1-3-3 Create a quotation for customer T-S62A## that is valid for a month, with purchase order number ##LO605-OT04 and any two items. Enter an order, order type ZA##, with reference to this quotation (purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##05). Copy both items.

Check the item numbering in the quotation and the sales order.

Item numbers in quotation: _________________________________

Item numbers in order: _________________________________

Page 156: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Unit: Data Flow

1-1 Try out the Create with reference function.

1-1-1 Create the inquiry and save the document.

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Inquiry Create

1-1-2 Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Inquiry Display

Choose Status overview.

Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Header Open Nothing rejected Not referenced

Item 10 Open Nothing rejected Not referenced

Item 20 Open Nothing rejected Not referenced

1-1-3 Create the quotation.

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Quotation Create

Choose Create with reference Inquiry, enter the Inquiry number, choose Selection List, and reduce the quantity of the second item. Choose Copy.

Page 157: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-4 Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Quotation Display

Choose Document flow, select one of the documents, and choose Status overview.

Total processing Rejection status Reference statusInquiryHeader Completed Nothing rejected Fully referencedItem 10 Completed Nothing rejected Fully referencedItem 20 Completed Nothing rejected Fully referencedQuotationHeader Open Nothing rejected Not referencedItem 10 Open Nothing rejected Not referencedItem 20 Open Nothing rejected Not referenced

1-1-5 Create the trade fair## order.

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Order Create

Choose Create with reference Quotation (tab), enter the quotation number, choose Selection List, and reduce the quantity of the second item. Choose Copy.

1-1-6 Logistics Sales and distribution Sales Quotation Display

Choose Status overview.

Item Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Header Being processed Nothing rejected Partially referencedItem 10 Completed Nothing rejected Fully referencedItem 20 Being processed Nothing rejected Partially referenced

1-1-7 Choose Reason for rejection.

Reason for rejection: Too expensive

Item Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Header Completed Partially rejected Partially referencedItem 20 Completed Fully rejected Partially referenced

Page 158: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Logistics Sales and Distribution Sales Order Create

Choose Create with Reference Quotation (tab)

1-2-1 You cannot create the quotation because it is already completed.

The system displays the following message: The reference has already been completely copied or rejected.

1-3 Check the Customizing of copying control for sales documents.

1-3-1 View the two documents.

The document numbers have been copied from the quotation. Otherwise, the item numbers would be generated in increments of 100.

1-3-2 IMG Sales and Distribution Sales Maintain copying control for sales documents

Choose Copying control: Sales document to sales documentChoose Change.

Choose Position.Target:ZA##Source: ORSelect the entry and choose Details.

Deselect field ”Copy item number” and save.

1-3-3 Verify the settings in the process.

Choose Create with Reference Quotation.

The document numbers are re-determined in the order, and item numbers are generated in increments of 100.

Page 159: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Special Business Transactions

Cash Sales

Rush deliveries

Consignments

Free-of-charge deliveries

Unit Contents:

Page 160: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Special Business Transactions: Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Explain the differences between cash sales andrush orders and their special features

Explain how customer consignments arerepresented in Customizing for Sales

Control free-of-charge deliveries andsubsequent free-of-charge deliveries

Page 161: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Special Business Transactions: Course OverviewDiagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0,-- ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data Flow

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

1. Introduction

8. Special Business Transactions

Page 162: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Special business transactions occur regularly inthe sales process at your company, IDES AG.

You want to support these processes with the R/3System.

It is your responsibility to find out about theprocess variants that are modeled in the standardSAP System.

In the process, you also want to find the controlparameters for individual modifications.

Special Business Transactions: Business Scenario

Page 163: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Rush Orders

Sold-to party: C1

Item Material Quantity10 M1 1020 M2 20

Created automatically

DF - DeliveryDocument no.: 8000 0070

Imm. delivery: XDelivery type: LF

Sales document typeRO - Rush order

RO - Rush orderDocument number: 2973Sold-to party: C1

Item Material Quantity10 M1 1020 M2 20

Rush orders and cash sales are sales document types that are used in the sales from plant process or for when the customer needs to pick up their goods immediately from the warehouse. In the sales document type for immediate delivery, the immediate delivery switch and delivery type DF are configured. When you save a rush order, the system automatically creates a delivery of type DF. Once the goods have been withdrawn from the warehouse, picking and posting goods issue can begin.When you create the billing documents (for example in collective processing), the system prints the invoice papers and sends them to the customer.

Page 164: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Cash Sales

Imm. delivery: XDelivery type: CS

Sales doc. type: CS - Cash sale

RD03

CS - Cash saleDoc. number: 2310

Sold-to party: C1

Item1020

MaterialM1M4

Quantity2010

CS - DeliveryDoc. no.: 8000 0397

Sold-to party: C1

Item1020

MaterialM1M4

Quantity2010

CS - Billing doc.Doc. no.: 9000 0071

Sold-to party: C1

Item1020

MaterialM1M4

Quantity2010

Invoice

Laser printerPrinter

Invoiceno.: 2310 x

Createdautomat.

In the sales document type for cash sales, the immediate delivery switch and delivery type CS are configured. When you save the cash sales, the system automatically creates a delivery of type CS and prints a document that can be given to the customer as an invoice. You control the invoice papers with output type RD03, contained in the output determination procedure for order type CS.Once the goods have been withdrawn from the warehouse, picking and posting goods issue can begin.An order-related billing index is generated automatically. This updates the billing due list. Billing type CS is created while the billing due list is being processed. The system does not print invoices during billing.

Page 165: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Consignments

Consignment issue

Consignment fill-up

Property of SD Inc.

Property of SD Inc.

SD Inc. Customer

Customer

In consignment processing, goods are delivered to the customer but remain the property of the company until they are actually used.An invoice is not created until the customer withdraws the goods from the consignment stock.The customer has the right to return consignment goods up until that point.You can use the special stock partner function if the consignment stocks are managed at a central point rather than by the sold-to party.

Page 166: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Consignment Fill-up and Issue

Consignment issue

Consignment fill-up

Customer: 1Goods issue

Billing document

Customerspecial stock

Outbound delivery

Consignment fill-up

Goods issueOutbound delivery

Consignment issue

You process consignment fill-up with order type CF. The goods issue sets up a special stock at the customer's. However, the goods remain in the valuated stocks of the delivering plant. This transaction isn't billed because the consignment stock remains the property of your company.Consignment issue is processed with order type CI. When goods are issued, both the customer special stock and the stock in the delivering plant are reduced. This transaction is relevant for billing.

Page 167: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Consignment Pick-up and Returns

Consignment returns

Consignment pick-up

Customer: 1Goods receipt

Credit memo

Customerspecial stock

Returnsdelivery

Consignmentpick-up

Goods receiptReturnsdelivery

Consignmentreturns

If the customer returns the goods, you can represent this with order type CP (consignment pick-up). This transaction credits the special customer stock during the goods issue. Like the consignment fill-up, this transaction is not relevant for billing.If you want to reverse a consignment issue, you can process this with document type CR (consignment return). The goods issue sets up the special stock at the customer's again. A credit memo is generated based on the consignment returns.

Page 168: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Deliveries Free of Charge and SubsequentDeliveries

LF Delivery DF Delivery free-of-charge

SDF Subs. del. free-of-charge

RE Returns

Reason for rejection 11

M1 10 PC KLN M1 10 PC

M1 10 PC KLN M1 10 PCM1 10 PC REN

LF Delivery

You create a delivery free-of-charge document, for example, when you want to send your customer a sample. You enter a subsequent delivery free-of-charge document, for example, when you need to deliver material for an order due to a complaint.Customizing for sales document type SDF determines that this transaction requires a preceding document. The relevant copying controls must be set up for all preceding documents that might be used, for example, copying control for SDF from a RE (returns order).By activating a delivery block in the sales document type, you ensure that delivery free-of-charge or subsequent delivery free-of-charge transactions are not released for delivery until they have been checked by the relevant employee. If the employee decides that the delivery should not take place, s/he can maintain a relevant reason for rejection in the sales document.In Customizing for item categories, you determine that items in sales document types DF and SDF are free of charge (for example with KLN or KLX). You can also decide what happens to these items with regard to pricing and billing.

Page 169: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Special Business Transactions: Summary

You are now able to:

Explain the differences between cash sales andrush orders and their special features

Explain how customer consignments arerepresented in Customizing for Sales

Control free-of-charge deliveries andsubsequent free-of-charge deliveries

Page 170: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Unit: Special Business Transactions

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Explain how complex business processes such as consignment processing are handled

• Explain how to control document types DF and SDF

Consignment processing offers your partners great advantages. Your customers manage the consignment stock themselves and can access the goods in the consignment warehouse at any time. They do not have to pay until the goods are issued and then only for the amount that has been issued.

There are two different cases that involve dispatching goods free of charge to the customers: The free of charge delivery of advertising materials and subsequent delivery within returns processing.

1-1 You agree to make material T-ATE## available immediately as consignment goods for customer T-S62A## .

Note: Check the stocks (plant 1200) in another session mode. You can call up the stock overview with the following menu path:

→ Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management → Environment → Stock → Stock overview

1-1-1 Check the consignment material stock.

Unrestricted use: _________________________________ Customer Consignment: _________________________________

Page 171: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-2 Send 100 units of the material to the customer’s consignment warehouse by entering a consignment fill-up (purchase order number ##LO605-CF01). Don’t forget to create a delivery and a transfer order and to post goods issue.

Notes:

1) Create the delivery directly from the order.Menu path: → Sales document → Deliver

2) Create a transfer order directly from the delivery.Menu path: Next functions → Create transfer request

3) Use the following settings: – Warehouse number: 12 Lean warehouse Dresden – Foreground/background: background – Adopt pick. quantity: 2 (copy picked quantity to delivery

as delivery quantity and post GI)

1-1-3 Check the consignment material stock.

Unrestricted use: _________________________________ Customer Consignment: _________________________________

1-1-4 Optional Try to create a billing document from the delivery document. Can you do it?

_________________________________

Why or why not?__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

1-1-5 The customer informs you that they have used 50 units of the material in the consignment warehouse. Enter a consignment issue (purchase order number ##LO605-CI01). Deliver the order and post goods issue.

Note: You can post the goods issue directly from the delivery, as the goods do not physically move in your warehouse (no transfer order required).Create the delivery directly from the order.Post the goods issue directly from the delivery.

Menu path: → Edit → Post goods issue

Page 172: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-6 Check the consignment material stock.

Unrestricted use: _________________________________ Customer Consignment: _________________________________

1-1-7 OptionalBill the consignment issue. Can you do it?

_________________________________

Why or why not?____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1-1-8 The customer informs you that they don’t need the remaining consignment goods. Enter a consignment pick-up (purchase order number ##LO605-CP01).

Deliver the order and post a goods issue.

1-1-9 Check the consignment material stock.

Unrestricted use: _________________________________ Customer Consignment: _________________________________

1-1-10 OptionalBill the consignment pick-up. Can you do it?

_________________________________

Why or why not?__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Page 173: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Optional Display consignment fill-up and consignment issue with purchase order numbers ##LO605-CF01 and ##LO605-CI01. Which item and schedule line categories did the system determine?

Item category Schedule line cat.

Consignment fill-up

Consignment issue

1-3 Optional How and why are these schedule line categories different from each other?

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________

1-4 What are the differences in Customizing for sales document types DF and SDF?

__________________________________________________________________ How can you ensure that the items in documents of this type are really delivered free of charge?

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Page 174: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Unit: Special Business Transactions

1-1 You agree with your customer to make a material available immediately as a consignment good.

1-1-1 Check the consignment material stock.

Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management→ Environment → Stock → Stock overview

Unrestricted stock: 2000 Customer Consignment: 0

1-1-2 Consignment fill-up

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create→ Order type: CF Consignment fill-up → Sales document → Deliver → Subsequent functions → Transfer order

1-1-3 Check the consignment material stock.

Unrestricted use: 1900Customer Consignment: 100

Page 175: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-4 Optional Try to create a billing document from the delivery document. Can you do it?

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing document → Create→ Enter document number of delivery

No

Log: The document is not relevant for billing.Cause: Billing has not been defined in Customizing for consignment fill-ups. There are no default values for sales document type CF for order- and delivery-related billing documents. Item category KBN is not relevant for billing.

1-1-5 Consignment issue. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create → Order type: CI Consignment issue

→ Sales document → Deliver → Edit → Post goods issue

1-1-6 Check the consignment material stock.

Unrestricted use: 1900Customer Consignment: 50

1-1-7 OptionalBill the consignment issue. Can you do it?

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing document → Create→ Enter document number of delivery

Yes

Cause: A delivery-related billing document has been defined for item category KEN in Customizing. Billing document type F2 has been proposed for delivery-related billing in sales document type CI.

Page 176: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-8 Consignment pick-up. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create → Order type: CP consignment pick-up

Deliver the order and post the goods issue.

→ Sales document → Deliver → Edit → Post goods issue

1-1-9 Check the consignment material stock.

Unrestricted use: 1950Consignment stock: 0

1-1-10 OptionalBill the consignment pick-up. Can you do it?

No

Why or why not?

Log: A billing type could not be determined.Cause: Billing has not been defined for the consignment pick-up. There are no default values for sales document type CP for order- and delivery-related billing documents. Delivery type LR does not contain a default order type from which alternative default values for order- and delivery-related billing documents could be determined. In addition, item category KAN is not relevant for billing.

Page 177: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 OptionalDisplay the consignment fill-up and the consignment issue. Which item and schedule line categories did the system determine?

Item category Schedule line cat.

Consignment fill-up KBN E0

Consignment issue KEN C0

1-3 Optional How and why are these schedule line categories different from each other?

Schedule line category E0: Movement type 631 (GI consignment lending) Schedule line category C0: Movement type 633 (GI Issue consignment customer)

During the fill-up, the affected stocks are moved from unrestricted use stocks to the customer’s consignment stocks (special stocks). The goods remain in the customer’s possession. Consignment issue posts the goods from the special stock and they become the property of the customer.

1-4 What are the differences in Customizing for sales document types DF and SDF?

Entry C in the Reference mandatory field means that document type SDF can only be created with reference to an order. The item categories for these order types are not relevant for billing.

Page 178: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Incompletion

Incompletion log

Incompletion status

Incompletion procedure

Lists of incomplete orders

Unit Contents:

Page 179: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Incompletion: Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Explain the incompletion log and processincomplete orders

Adjust the incompletion log in Customizing tomeet your requirements

Page 180: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Incompletion: Course Overview Diagram

§

0,-- ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special Business Transactions

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

1. Introduction

9. Incompletion

XYZ/99XYZ/99M1M1 -?--?-

Page 181: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Incompletion: Business Scenario

A variety of information is required to ensure thatthe sales processes at your company runsmoothly.

The amount of information required can differdepending on the process.

It is your responsibility to configure the system insuch a way to make sure that people can verify thatthe document data is complete during documententry.

You want to control which subsequent functions ofthe document are blocked depending on whichinformation is missing in the document.

Page 182: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Incompletion Log

Sold-to party: C1Order number: ---

F2F2

F3F3

Is called up:a) Automatically when savedb) Through the menu

F5F5

Order

Order: Incompletion Log x

Item

10

Missing dataPO numberRouteSchedule line

Item 10Material: M3Route: ---

Schedule line

Schedule line

Item 20Material: M2Route: 00001

An incompletion log is a list of all the data essential to your company in a sales document that has not yet been entered in the system.You can define these data fields in Customizing for the incompletion log.The system goes directly from the incompletion log to the different views where you can then edit the incomplete data.

Page 183: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Lists of Incomplete Orders

Start

Review data

ListOrder 4231Order 6574Order 7019

Order: 6574Sold-to party: C1

Material

M1

M4

Quantity

10

15

Item

10

20

SaveSelection

Incomplete ordersSelection via

Created by LO605-##

Every employee can list all of the incomplete sales orders that they have created. They can also display certain documents that have been blocked for a particular step in a selection screen, such as a list of all the documents blocked for shipping due to incompleteness.Incomplete orders can be then called up from the list and completed. When you have finished processing, the system automatically returns to the list of incomplete documents.

Page 184: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Incomplete Sales Documents

Incompletion dialogSales document type

The document mustbe completely

maintained

YesStill possible

to savedocument ?

Sales document

Sold-to party:C1 Smith New York

Is documentcomplete ?

NoYes

No

Block subsequent functions in document:

For example: - Create w/ reference - Shipping- Billing document

In Customizing for sales document types, the incomplete messages field allows you to control whether incomplete sales documents can be saved or not. If this switch is not set, then the further course of the business process is determined from the status groups of the incompleteness procedure. The procedure controls what effects the incomplete data has on the process. ExamplesIf the terms of payment are missing, the order can be delivered but it cannot be billed. At the same time, you will not be able to create a new order with reference to an incomplete order.The incompletion log tells you if the purchase order number is missing, but you can continue to process the document.

Page 185: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Controlling the Incompletion Log

Assignment

Procedure

Incompletion log

Sales document header

Sales document item

Sales document schedule line

10 Inquiry and quotation

11 Order

...Purchase order numberCurrencyTerms of payment

Sales doc. type Procedure

QT QuotationOR Standard orderZO Z order

101111

The incompletion log differentiates between the following levels:Sales document headerSales document itemSales document schedule line

In each procedure you determine which fields are checked for completion. You determine areas of validity by assigning procedures. For example, you can assign the incompletion procedure for the sales document header, using the sales document type. Procedure at header level -> Sales document typeProcedure at item level -> Item categoryProcedure at schedule line level -> Schedule line category

You can also flag partner functions, texts and condition types in pricing as mandatory. If these entries are then missing, a note will appear in the incompletion log.

Page 186: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Status of Incomplete Sales Documents

0101

0202

0303

...

...

General Delivery Billing Pricing(Sales)General Delivery Billing Pricing(Sales)

X

65Order Field Status group

PO number 01Currency 03Terms of payment 03

Procedure

X

X

X

X

Statusgroup

Incomplete document data affects further processing in different ways. A status group is assigned to each field in the incompletion procedure. When you define the status groups, you decide which steps should be prevented if data is missing. ExamplesIncomplete for delivery -> No delivery is possibleIncomplete for billing -> No billing is possibleIncomplete for pricing -> No order confirmation or billing are possible

A status group can contain any number of these effects.This allows you to control the effect of incomplete data separately for each field.

Page 187: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Incompletion: Summary

You are now able to:

Explain the incompletion log and processincomplete orders

Adjust the incompletion log in Customizing tomeet your requirements

Page 188: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Unit: Incompleteness

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Use the incompleteness log for sales documents during document processing and control it in Customizing

The incompleteness log ensures that you cannot continue with certain steps in the business process when essential data is missing.

1-1 You would like to ensure that sales documents of type ZA## cannot be left incomplete in sales order processing.

1-1-1 Create an order with order type ZA## for customer T-S62A## and material T-ATA## (10 units) and save the document without a purchase order number.Can you do it?

_________________________________

1-1-2 Activate the Incomplete. messages indicator for sales document type ZA##.

1-1-3 Create another order with order type ZA## for customer T-S62A## and material T-ATA## (10 units) and save the document without a purchase order number.Can you do it?

_________________________________

Page 189: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-4 Process the incompleteness log by maintaining purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##07. Save the document.

1-1-5 Delete the Incomplet. messages indicator for this sales document type.

1.2 You want to ensure that the name of the contact person (Document header: Tab page Purchase Order Data, Field Name) who is responsible for the sales order is always entered in trade fair orders.

1-2-1 Create incompleteness procedure Y# with description Order procedure ## (key of the new procedure for each student group: see the following table):

Key: Y# (see the following table!)Description Order procedure ##

Key of the new procedure for each student group (ignore the system message regarding the namespace conventions):

Group number

Proced. Group number

Proced. Group number

Proced.

01 YA 07 YG 13 YM

02 YB 08 YH 14 YN

03 YC 09 YI 15 YO

04 YD 10 YJ 16 YP

05 YE 11 YK 17 YQ

06 YF 12 YL 18 YR

1-2-2 Copy the field for the ordering party’s name BNAME from table VBAK into the procedure. This field will be displayed in the KBES Header - Purchase order data sales order screen. If the ordering party’s name is missing in the sales document, the system should not create a delivery. Assign a corresponding status group.

1-2-3 Assign incompleteness procedure Y# to sales document type ZA##.

Page 190: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3 Create an order with order type ZA## for customer T-S62A## and material T-ATA## (1 unit).

1-3-1 Save the incomplete order.

1-3-2 Try to deliver the order. Set the selection date to a month from today. What message appears?

_________________________________

1-3-3 Change the order and edit the incompleteness log.

1-3-4 Try to deliver the order again. Can you do it?

_________________________________

Page 191: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Unit: Incompleteness

1-1 You would like to ensure that sales documents of type ZA## cannot be left incomplete in sales order processing.

1-1-1 Create an order and save it without entering a purchase order number.Can you do it?

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order (order type ZA##) → Create

Yes, the incomplete document can be saved.

1-1-2 Set the Incompleteness dialog indicator in sales document type ZA## (select field IC dialog)

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header→ Define Sales Document Types → Select document type ZA## → Activate indicator → Save

1-1-3 Create an order and save it without entering a purchase order number.Can you do it?

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order (order type ZA##) → Create

No

1-1-4 Edit the incompleteness log and save the document.

→ Button: Complete data → Enter the purchase order number → Back → Save

Page 192: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-5 Delete the Incomplet. messages indicator for this sales document type.(delete the indicator you set above in field IC dialog)→ see above (1-1-2)

1-2 You want to ensure that the name of the contact person who is responsible for the sales order is always entered in trade fair orders.

1-2-1 Create incompleteness procedure Y# (key of the new procedure for each student group: see table in unit ”Exercises”):

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Incompleteness → Define Incompleteness Procedures → Select group A → Dialog structure: Procedures → Icon: Change → Button: New entries

1-2-2 Add the field for the ordering party’s name to the procedure and assign it a status group.

→ Dialog structure: Fields → Button: New entries → Maintain entries Status group: 02 → Save → Exit

Note: You can determine the names of tables and fields in the sales document by placing the cursor on the relevant field, pressing F1 and pressing the button: Technical info.(Document header: Tab page Purchase Order Data, Field Name)

1-2-3 Assign incompleteness procedure Y# to sales document type ZA##.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Log of incomplete items…→ Assign incompleteness procedures→ Assign procedures to sales document types → Maintain entries → Save → Exit

Page 193: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3 Create an order

1-3-1 Save the incomplete order.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order (order type ZA##) → Create

1-3-2 Try to deliver the order. What message appears?

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change → Sales document → Deliver

Message: The order cannot be deliveredLog: Order is incomplete (maintain the order)

1-3-3 Change the order and edit the incompleteness log.

Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Change → Edit → Log of incomplete items → Select the ordering party’s name → Button: Complete data → Back

1-3-4 Try to deliver the order again. Can you do it?

→ Sales document → Deliver

Yes, the order can be delivered.

Page 194: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Business Partners and Partner Determination

Partner functions

Partner types

Partner determination procedure

Unit Contents:

Page 195: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to

Name the most important criteria for determiningbusiness partners

Set up new business partners in Customizing

Include additional business partners in the salesprocess

Page 196: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0,-- ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special Business Transactions

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

3. Sales Order Processing

1. Introduction

10. Partnerdetermination

Page 197: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination: Business Scenario

As part of your efforts to improve customerservice, you want to assign each of yourcustomers a sales employee as their own personalrepresentative.

This information should be available automaticallyin your sales documents.

Your company is also investigating whether youcan evaluate this data, to obtain the criteria forawarding performance bonuses to your staff.

Page 198: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Business Partners

Market

Customer

Vendor Customer

Contactperson

Contactperson

Company

Employee

Employee

1

1 2

2

34

5

6

Different business partners with different business relationships with each other all exist within a marketplace.Examples of business partners are:CustomerVendorEmployeeContact person

Examples of business relationships are:1. Vendor-customer: The vendor acts as the forwarding agent to the customer2. Contact person - customer: The contact person is employed at the customer's company3. Contact person - customer: The contact person is the customer's consultant but does not work in the same company

4. Customer-customer: Sold-to party and ship-to party are different people5. Employee - contact person: Contact person is looked after individually6. Employee - customer: Customer manager

Page 199: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partner types

Create sold-to partyCreate sold-to party

Partner functionsContact personSold-to partySales employee

Contact partner numberCustomer number Personnel number

Sold-to party Ship-to party

Partner Partner functionfunction

Payer

Forwarding agent

Vendor

Buyer

= Customer

= Employee

= Vendor= Contact person

Contactperson

Representative

Salespersonnel

The business partners that exist in the marketplace are represented with a partner type in the R/3 System.Partner types AP, KU, LI and PE are defined in partner processing for the Sales and Distribution application module. These are defined as follows:AP Contact personKU CustomerLI VendorPE PersonnelIn other applications (such as Service Management) different partner types have been defined (for example, O for organizational unit, S for position, A for work center).

Page 200: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partner Functions

FA Forwardingagent

SH Ship-to party

PY Payer

ER Employee responsible BP Bill-to party

. . . . .

SP Sold-to party

AP Contact person

BusinessBusinesspartnerpartner

While the partner types allow us to distinguish between different business partners, the partner functions represent the roles they play within the business transaction.For example, different customers (customer partners) can assume certain roles in a business transaction. The customer who places the order does not necessarily have to be the same customer who receives the goods or the customer who is responsible for paying the invoice.

Assigning partner functions in the SAP system determines the function(s) of particular partners in the sales process. One partner may take on several functions. In the simplest case, all the partner functions within the customer partner type would be assigned to one business partner, in other words, the same customer would be the sold-to party, ship-to party, payer and bill-to party.

You can enter contact persons for a customer directly in the customer master and they are automatically assigned to that customer. The contact person can also be assigned to another customer, for example, in a consultant role.The forwarding agent is an example of a vendor.Employees of your own company (such as sales representatives or clerks) are managed in the employee master records. They can assume partner functions of partner type "Personnel", such as partner function ER, responsible employee.

Page 201: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partners in the Sales Process

Partner functions:SP Sold-to party: C1BP Bill-to party: C1PY Payer: C1SH Ship-to party: C1, C2, C3

HEADERSP : C1 PY : C1SH : C2 PY : C1

ITEM 1

ITEM 2

SH : C2 C3

Proposal+ selection

Changes possible ifpartner function SH is

configured at item level

Also valid for items unless

agreed to otherwise

Customer master

Order

You can maintain partner relationships both in sales documents and in the master data. Partner relationships are usually already defined in the customer master. They are proposed automatically in the document header when you create a sales document. If Customizing permits it, you can change or supplement these relationships manually by going to the partner screen and changing the function assignment.

In Customizing, you decide whether several partners can be assigned to one partner function in the customer master. If multiple partners of the same function are maintained, when you then enter a sales order, a selection list appears containing these partners.In the sales documents, the system has been configured so that only one partner can be assigned to each partner function. The only exception is for outline agreements (partner functions AA and AW).You can also define partners at item level in the sales documents. However, business partners that are only defined in the header cannot be changed at item level.You can determine which partner functions must be entered (mandatory functions).You can prohibit anyone from changing a partner that has already been entered (for example, you could indicate the sold-to party cannot be changed in the sales document).It is also possible to enter or change the address of a partner, such as the ship-to party, manually. This change does not affect the master record.

Page 202: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination Procedure (1)

Customer masterSales document headerSales document itemDelivery Billing headerBilling itemSales activity (CAS)

Page 203: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination Procedure (2)

Procedure for sales documents

Customer masterSales document headerSales document itemDelivery Billing headerBilling itemSales activity (CAS)

Procedure for customer master records

(1)(1) (1)(1)

AG Sold-to partyRG PayerWE Ship-to party

TA Standard orderSM Product proposalKAB Release order

Page 204: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination Procedure (3)

Procedure for sales documents

AG Sold-to partyRG PayerWE Ship-to party

Customer masterSales document headerSales document itemDelivery Billing headerBilling itemSales activity (CAS)

TA Standard orderSM Product proposalKAB Release order

Procedure for customer master records

Sold-to partyShip-to partyPayerSales partner Forwarding agent. . .

(2)(2)(2)(2)

(1)(1) (1)(1)

Possible partner functions

Page 205: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination Procedure (4)

Procedure for sales documents

SP Sold-to partyPY PayerST Ship-to party

Customer masterSales document headerSales document itemDelivery Billing headerBilling itemSales activity (CAS)

OR Standard orderSM Product proposalKAB Release order

QT QuotationOR Standard orderDF Free-of-charge delivery. . .

0001 Sold-to party0100 Distribution centerCPD One-time customers. . .

Assign to document type

Procedure for customer master records

Assign to account group

Sold-to partyShip-to partyPayerSales partner Forwarding agent. . .

Defined partnerfunctions

(2)(2)

(3)(3)

(2)(2)

(3)(3)

(1)(1) (1)(1)

Partners appear in the system at different levels, such as the customer master, in the sales document header, in the sales document items, and so on.You can define your own partner determination procedures for each of these levels.A partner determination procedure is where you determine which partner functions should or must appear.You determine areas of validity by assigning procedures. For example, you use the account group to assign the partner determination procedure for the customer master. The partner procedures are assigned to the partner objects as follows:Partner object Assignment keyCustomer master -> Account groupSales document header -> Sales doc. typeSales document item -> Item category in salesDelivery -> Delivery typeShipment -> Shipment typeBilling header -> Billing typeBilling item -> Billing typeSales activities (CAS) -> Sales activity type

Page 206: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Customer Master and Account Group

0001 Sold-to party

0002 Ship-to party

0003 Payer

0004 Bill-to party

Field selectionNumber assignmentOne-time account: Yes/NoProposed message

ACCOUNT GROUP 0001

Create sold-to party

Customer : C1

Sales organization : 1000

Distribution channel : 10

Division : 00

Account group : 0001

ACCOUNT GROUP

The account group controls the amount of data and the response of customer master records. Account groups are already defined in the standard SAP system, such as account group 0001 Sold-to party, 0002 Ship-to party, 0003 Payer, and so on. . . You can create additional account groups as necessary.When you define the account group, you determine:For each data field, whether it is displayed or not and whether maintenance is mandatory, optional, or not possibleThe number rangeA number of other control elements, such as for partners and texts of the customer master

Example:A customer master record for a customer that only acts as a ship-to party (created with account group 0002) requires the information relevant for shipping. The billing information is not required, which is why the corresponding fields are not displayed.In contrast to the account group, which controls a customer master record, the partner function determines which partner assumes specific business functions within the sales process.

Page 207: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Permitted Partner Functions per Account Groups

Partner function SP Account group 0001, 0005, CPD,...

Account group (Definition)

0001 Sold-to party0002 Ship-to party0003 Payer0004 Bill-to party0005 Prospective customer0007 Sales partner. . .

Partner function (definition)

SP Sold-to partySH Ship-to partyPY PayerBP Bill-to partyCP Contact personFA Forwarding agent. . .

In which account group can customersassume the role of the sold-to party?

In which account group can customersassume the role of the ship-to party?

Partner function SH Account group 0001, 0002, CPD,...

For organized sales processing, it is important that each customer is only used for the functions within a document that have been assigned to him or her. You can guarantee this by assigning permitted partner functions to each account group.If you choose partner type customer for a new partner function, you then have to determine which of your customers can be entered for this partner type. Because you control the customers through the account group, you assign all the defined partner functions to each account group. As a result, the account group of a customer also controls the possible partner functions.Examples from the standard system:Customers in the following account groups can be sold-to parties:0001, 0005, 0007, CPD, and so on . .Customers in account groups 0002 (ship-to party), 0003 (payer) or 0004(bill-to party) cannot be sold-to parties.

Page 208: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination for Sales Documents

Order

Sold-to party:C1 Smith New York

Partners

SP C1 Smith NYSH S1 Smith SFPY P1 Smith HQ. . .. . .

?Origin

Customerhierarchy

KNVH

Creditrepresentative

T024P

System user

Customer master

KNVP

Contactperson

KNVK

When you create sales documents, the business partners are automatically copied from the customer master. In the process, the customer master of the sold-to party is accessed. Several partner relationships are stored in the customer master record for a sold-to party. The system can also copy a partner function from other customer master records to create a partner for the sales document by specifying the source of the partner function and the determination sequence. When you do, you should note the sequence in which the system determines the partners.Example of indirect partner functions:

You have different regular suppliers in different regions. You want the system to determine the forwarding agent in the sales document dependent on the ship-to party. In Customizing, you determine that the system determines the ship-to party first by accessing the master record for the sold-to party. Then it accesses the ship-to party's master record to determine the forwarding agent.

You can also use other sources to automatically determine business partners in sales documents, such as the tables for customer hierarchy (KNVH), contact persons (KNVK), credit representatives (T024P), and so on. . .An analysis function is available for tracing the automatic determination of business partners in sales documents in detail.

Page 209: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination: Unit Summary

You are now able to:

Name the most important criteria for determiningbusiness partners

Set up new business partners in Customizing

Include additional business partners in the salesprocess

Page 210: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Unit: Business Partners and Partner Determination

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Include and control your own business partners in the master data and business processes

Your company wants to improve their customer care. Therefore, you would like to assign a personal representative to important customers, such as customer T-S62C##, who would then be responsible for ensuring that the business transactions with that customer run smoothly.

1-1 Enter a new partner function 9# for the personal representative in Customizing. (Key of the new role for each student group: see table below)

Key: 9# (see the following table!)Description: Representative ## Partner type: PE

Keys of the new function for each student group:

Group number

Partner function

Group number

Partner function

Group number

Partner function

01 9A 07 9G 13 9M

02 9B 08 9H 14 9N

03 9C 09 9I 15 9O

04 9D 10 9J 16 9P

05 9E 11 9K 17 9Q

06 9F 12 9L 18 9R

Page 211: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Create a new partner determination procedure Z## with description Procedure ## for object ”customer master”.

Enter the following partner functions:– SP Sold-to party (cannot be changed, mandatory function) – SH Ship-to party (mandatory function) – BP Bill-to party (mandatory function) – PY Payer (mandatory function) – 9# Representative ## Customer T-S62C##’s master record is controlled by account group ZK##. Assign the new procedure to account group ZK##.

1-3 Extend the customer master record for customer T-S62C## in sales area 1000 / 10 / 00 with the personal representative.

Note: In the master data menu for Sales, choose: → Business partners → Customers → Change → Sales and Distribution → Button: Sales area data; Sales tab card: Partner functionsEnter employee 1701## in the partner screen as the personal representative and save the master record.

1-4 Optional In the next step, verify that the new partner in the master record will be automatically controlled in document type ZA##.

1-4-1 Create a new partner determination procedure Y## with description Order procedure ## for object ”sales document type”.

1-4-2 Enter the following partner functions:– SP Sold-to party (cannot be changed, mandatory function) – SH Ship-to party (mandatory function) – BP Bill-to party (mandatory function) – PY Payer (mandatory function) – 9# Representative ## (mandatory function) – SE Sales employee

1-4-3 Assign the new procedure to sales document type ZA##.

Page 212: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-5 Optional Determine whether the partner function 9# Representative ## was automatically transferred from the customer master record to the order.

1-5-1 Create a trade fair## order for customer T-S62C## (purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##06). Determine whether the partner function 9# representative ## has been stored as a partner in the order header.

1-5-2 Also enter an employee called Hubert Schwarz as the sales employee.

1-5-3 Can you determine the sales employee from the sold-to party’s master record?

_________________________________

Why or why not?____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

Page 213: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Unit: Business Partners and Partner Determination

1-1 Create a new partner function. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Partner Determination → Define partner functions → Button: Partner functions → Create entry (by overwriting an existing entry) → Save

1-2 Create a new partner determination procedure for object “customer master” → Back → Select partner object ”Customer master” → Button: Partner procedures → Complete entry Z## → Save → Position cursor on procedure → Button: Procedure details → Enter functions → Save → Goto → Procedure assignment → Account group ZK## – Partner procedure Z## → Save → Exit

1-3 Extend the customer master record for customer T-S62C## with the personal representative.

→ Business partners → Customer → Change → Sales and distribution → Button: Sales area data → Sales tab card: Partner function → Partner function: Add representative ##

1-4 OptionalCreate a new partner determination procedure for object “Sales document header”

1-4-1 IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Partner Determination → Define and assign partner determination procedures → Select Object: Select sales document header → Button: Partner procedures → Complete entry Y## → Save

Page 214: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-4-2 Enter partner functions → Position cursor on procedure → Button: Procedure details → Enter functions → Save

1-4-3 Assign the procedure → Goto → Procedure assignment→ Sales document type ZA## – Partner procedure Y## → Save → Exit

1-5 Optional Check whether the new partner function was automatically transferred from the customer master record to the order.

1-5-1 Create an order. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order (order type: ZA##) → Create

1-5-2 Also enter the sales representative. → Goto → Header → Partners → Search for the employee’s personnel number using a matchcode

1-5-3 Can you determine the sales employee from the sold-to party’s master record?

No

Why or why not?

Partner procedure Z##, which controls this customer, does not contain this function. As a result, you cannot save the function of the sales employee in the customer’s master record. This means that the system cannot use the customer master to propose this partner in the sales document.

Page 215: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Outline Agreements

Scheduling agreement

Quantity contract

Value contract

Partners authorized to release

Contract data and rental contracts

Unit Contents:

Page 216: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Outline Agreements: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Use different types of outline agreements and theirfunctions

Configure outline agreements in Customizing so thatthey meet your requirements

Page 217: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Outline Agreements: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

0,-- ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special businesstransactions

9. Incomp-leteness

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

3. Sales order processing

10. Partnerdetermination

1. Introduction

§§

Page 218: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Outline Agreements: Business Scenario

Your company, IDES AG, has excellent businessrelationships with many of its customers, andconducts frequent transactions with them.

Together with these customers, your companywants to plan the business processes for thefuture based on contractual agreements.

Different types of outline agreements will beneeded, depending on the product and thecustomer involved.

It is your responsibility to find out the extent towhich the different outline agreements can bemodeled using the available sales document typesin the SAP System.

Page 219: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Contracts - Sales Document Types

Outline agreements

Schedulingagreements

• SA Schedulingagreement

• BL Sched. agr.with del. sched.

• DEL Sched. agr. forexternal agent

• . . .

Contracts

• NMS Quantity contract

• WK1 General valuecontract

• WK2 Material-related value contract

• RC Rental contract

• SC Service andmaintenance

Outline agreements play an important role in nearly all business processes. Customers and vendors agree on the goods to be provided under certain conditions and within a specific timeframe. Outline agreements streamline business processes for both partners in a business relationship. Different sales document types represent different outline agreements in the SAP System. The standard SAP system contains a range of different document types that you can either use directly or copy as references.The two main outline agreements are scheduling agreements and contracts. The simplest and most common type of scheduling agreement is represented in the system with document type SA. Document types for scheduling agreements such as BL or DEL are special cases, that are used in the automotive component supplier industry. There are two types of contracts - value and quantity. Contracts can cover both goods and services. Generally, no restrictions apply to the different contract forms. Rental and maintenance contracts are frequently used in the service industry. Maintenance agreements are signed for products that the customer uses over a long period of time and which need to be serviced during that time. Alongside maintenance contracts, we also offer the Service Management application module whose functions are explained in another course.

Page 220: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Scheduling Agreements

Scheduling agreement

04/0106/01

Delivery

Delivery

Delivery

A scheduling agreement is an outline agreement between you and a sold-to party that is valid for a certain period of time. The scheduling agreement contains fixed delivery dates and quantities. These dates are contained in the schedule lines for the scheduling agreements. Once the scheduling agreement is due for delivery, you can create the delivery as normal or by using a delivery due list. When you enter schedule lines for an item in the scheduling agreement, the system adds up the quantities that have already been entered and compares them to both the target quantity and the quantity already shipped. This gives you an overview of all the open quantities.If the quantity in the schedule lines exceeds the target quantity, the system issues a warning message. If the customer requires it, you can process invoices periodically, for example, once a month. All the deliveries due for the billing document are combined in a collective invoice.

Page 221: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Quantity Contracts

Update released quantities

Contract

Delivery

Delivery

Delivery

Release order

Release order

Release order

A contract is an outline agreement between you and your customer that is valid for a certain time period. The contract does not contain any schedule lines, delivery quantities, or delivery dates. The same functions are available in contracts as in orders. You can also agree on special price agreements or delivery times.The customer fulfills the contract with individual releases. Schedule lines are created in the release order when it is placed. The release order is then processed like a standard order. Any special agreements regarding prices or delivery deadlines are copied from the contract.Release orders are created with reference to a contract. This generates a document flow record that allows you to update released quantities and values in the contract.In copying control, you decide which types of sales documents can be used as release orders from a contract.You can create release orders in the following ways:Choose Create with reference on the initial screenIn the Sales document menu, choose Sales document -> Create with reference -> To contract... Assign an order item to a contract subsequentlyUse the automatic system search for open outline agreements when you create an order

Page 222: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Messages about Open Outline Agreements

M1 100 PCM2 30 L

Order

Material ValueM3 5 PC 5 000 USD - 10% discount

Customer: Smith Inc.London

Open outline agreements xThere are open outlineagreements for materialM3

List

Continue

Cancelx

Referenced documentsList Edit Goto System Help

Open documents for customer

Copy

OrderTy Doc Item . . .

KM 40000069 0010 . . .

KM 40001292 0030 . . .

. . .

You can configure Customizing for the sales document type so that when you create a release order the system automatically searches for any open outline agreements. You can choose several options for the search and how the system should react if the search is successful:Blank No checksA/B Check at header / item level:The system compares the customer and material numbers. If there are any open outline agreements, it displays a dialog box where you can choose whether to display a list of the agreements or continue processing the sales order.C/D Check at header / item level and copy if unique:If the system finds exactly one open outline agreement, the document is created automatically. Instead of displaying a dialog box, the system issues an informational message in the status bar for the release.E/F Check at header / item level and branch immediately to selection list: Instead of displaying a dialog box, the system immediately goes to the selection list. No dialog box is displayed. If there is only one open contract, ,the system reacts as in C/D.

Page 223: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Value Contracts

Contract

Item Target value 10 10 000 UNI

- 10% discount

Customer: Smith AGHeadquarters

Validity: 01/2000 - 12/200X

The value contract is an outline agreement between you and your customer. It defines that your customer agrees to purchase a fixed dollar value (target amount) of goods and services during the defined period. The value contract can contain other agreements between you and your customer that are checked in the release orders:Special price agreementsCustomer restrictionsMaterial restrictions

If the check is activated in Customizing, when you enter a release order, the system issues a message informing you whether there are any valid contracts.You can change the target values in the contract later.

Page 224: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Valid Materials

Producthierarchy

Level1 00001 Tools00001 Tools

0000100001 Electric 0000100002 Pneum.2

3 . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .

D1 Installation

M1 Material 1M5 Material 5

D3 Maintenance... ...

Assortmentmodule

In the standard system you can restrict the materials that can be released in a value contract in the following ways:Product hierarchy (can be searched for generically by entering the first few digits such as 0000101*)List of valid materials (assortment module)

If both the product hierarchy and the assortment module are maintained in the document, all of the materials that belong to one or other of the material groups are valid for the release order (logical OR link).Assortment modules for value contracts are maintained in the master data for products. You can define a validity period for each material in the assortment module. When you create a release order, the system checks the respective entry date against the validity period.If you have not made any entries in the document, all the materials defined in sales can be released unless there are any other restrictions in copying control at item level. These materials are also limited in that they must be permitted for the sales area assigned to the value contract (copying control).

Page 225: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Value Contracts - Releases

Release order

Material Value M1 PC 6 000 UNI6 000 UNI - 10% discount- 10% discount

Customer: Smith Inc.New York

Release order

Material Value M2 3Pc 6 000 UNI - 10% discount

Customer: Smith Inc.New York

Release order

Material Value M3 5 PC 5 000 USD - 10% discount

Customer: Smith Inc.London

Contractalreadyfulfilled

Contract

Item Target value 10 10 000 UNI - 10% discount

Customer: Smith AG HeadquartersValidity: 01/00- 12/0X

A release order releases a partial quantity of the agreed total value of the goods or services from a contract. The release order is a type of sales order.Normally, you create a release order with reference to a contract. Several functions exist for searching for the relevant contract:Search for suitable contracts using the partner numberSearch for suitable partners using the contract number (for customer lists only)

With the item selection function, you can select items from all the valid materials. You can choose materials directly or by exploding an assortment module.Delivery quantities and times are stored in the schedule lines for the release order. You can create releases in any currency and the total value is updated in the currency of the contract.When you create a release order, the system checks the requirements stored in the contract such as the release rule or validity period. The value of the release order is compared with the value still open in the contract. You can define how the system responds when this value is exceeded.You can assign an order to a contract later both at the header and the item level but the contract values will only be updated if you assign it at the item level. In both cases, the system automatically re-runs pricing. Values in the contract can only be updated when the assignment is defined at item level.

Page 226: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Updating Values in Contracts

Release order

Material Value M3 5 PC 5 000 USD - 10% discount

Customer: Smith Inc.London

Returns

Material Value M3 2 PC 2 000 USD - 10% discount

Customer: Smith Inc.London

Change

Contract

Item Released value 10 4 725 UNI

Customer: Smith AG HeadquartersValidity: 01/00- 12/0XUpdate release

valueCorrected release value

When you create a release order, the system automatically updates the released values in the contract. The release value is calculated from the total of open order and delivery values as well as the values in the contract that have already been billed.You can change the value in a value contract item later.Subsequent changes to the release are updated in the contract. These could be:Rejected release itemsReturnsOverdelivery of release orderPricing changes to the billing documentDeleted orders or deliveriesCancelled deliveries or billing documents

The document flow represents the whole business process from contracts to release orders, deliveries, billing documents and returns processing.

Page 227: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Value Contracts - Billing Documents

Contract

Item Target value 10 10 000 UNI - 10% discount

Customer: Smith AG HeadquartersValidity: 01/00- 12/0X

Release order

Material Net value M3 5 PC 5 000 USD - 10% discount

Customer: Smith Inc.London

Billing document

Material Net value M1 2 PC .... UNI M2 5 PC .... UNI

Customer: Smith Inc.

Billrelease? Billing plan?

You can either bill the value contract directly or you can bill each release order.Billing a release order

You can use standard order OR for release orders. Billing can be either order- or delivery-related.

Billing a value contractOrder type WA exists in the standard system for the release. The value contract is then billed according to the order.A billing plan allows you to bill the contract for several dates and partial quantities at once. The system automatically adjusts the open billing dates if you make a subsequent change to the target value in an item in the value contract.

The system does not allow you to automatically bill value contracts that have not been completelyreleased.

Page 228: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Controlling Value Contracts

VCTR?VCIT?

Sales doc. type Item category

WK1 - With assortment module - Doc. procedure Y

WK2 - Material-related - Doc. procedure Y

WK0001 with WK00

WK1 -> WKN

WK2 -> WKC

Completion rule E

Value contract material

Contract release control

There are two types of value contracts in the SAP standard system: WK1 General value contract: This order type allows you to refer to different materials and services according to the selection options described earlier.WK2 Material-related value contract: This is used when the contract contains exactly one material (for example, configurable).

In Customizing, you only distinguish between the sales document types for value contracts WK1 and WK2 in the screen sequence group for document header and item. You can maintain the value contract material in the item category. It acts as a technical vehicle in the contract item for determining important data, such as account assignments, taxes or statistical updates. Document type WK1 uses item category WKN. Document type WK2 uses item category WKC. According to what you enter in the item, the system determines the item category with the usage indicator VCTR or the item category group VCIT. In copying control, you can decide at item level if the value contract material should be copied to the release, (WKC) or not (WKN). If a release exceeds the target value in a contract item, you can configure how the system reacts: no response, two different warning messages and an error message.In the standard system, value contracts (document determination procedure Y) use pricing procedure WK0001 with condition type WK00 for the agreed target value.

Page 229: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partners Authorized to Release in Contract

Contract

Material Value M1 4St 6 000 UNI - 10% discount

Sold-to party:Smith Inc., New York

Partner authorized torelease: Smith & Little, SF

Partner functionSP

Partner function AA

Customerhierarchy

Normally, both the sold-to party and other business partners are authorized to release from a contract. This means that the central office for a company can decide which of its branches can release from a contract. There may also be several ship-to parties. To meet this requirement, maintain the Check partner authorization field in Customizing for the sales document type. In the sales order, you can then display the partners authorized to release in a customer list (rule A) or in the customer hierarchy (rule B).The partner determination procedure assigns the partners authorized to release against the contract.If there are several partners authorized to release against a contract, you can choose the relevant partner from a list when you create the release order.If there are several ship-to parties that are authorized to release for the selected sold-to party, you can choose the relevant one from a list when you create the release.So that the releasing partner can be different than the sold-to party for the contract, copying control uses requirement 002 (different customer to that in header) at header level.

Page 230: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partners Authorized to Release: Customer List

Contract40002000Header/Partner

ORPYBPSP

AAAAAAAWAWAW

4711472247334744

481048114812491049114912

OrderHeader/PartnerORPYBPSP

4812472247334911

Select SH

4711 Meyer4810 Glory4811 Becker4812 Cohen

New YorkDallasPhoenixSan Diegox

Selection: OR x

Releasing partnerContract 40002000

Req. delivery date D 06/19/200x

Create Order: Initial Screen x

Select SH

4744 Meyer4910 Weber4911 Singer4912 Hart

Las VegasPhoenixPhoenixPhoenix

x

Selection: SP x

Rule A Check contract partners If there is a customer list, you can store the partners authorized to release directly in the partner screen for the contract document. In the standard system, partner function AA has been defined for use as an optional partner function in the relevant partner determination procedure (KAB procedure in the standard system).

Alternative ship-to parties are represented with partner function AW.If there are already several possible sold-to parties in the customer master record (partner functions SP and AA), when you create the contract, the system displays a selection screen where you can choose and copy several partners in one step.Partners authorized to release are only checked at header level.

Page 231: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Partners Authorized to Release - CustomerHierarchy

4711

4886

4812

4955

4710

Contract40002000Header/PartnerORPYBPSP

AWAWAW

4711472247334744

491049114912

Customerhierarchy

Order

Header/PartnerORPYBPSP

4810

4811

4812472247334911

Select SH

4711 Meyer4810 Glory4811 Becker4812 Cohen

New YorkDallasPhoenixSan Diegox

Selection: OR x

Releasing partnerContract 40002000

Req. delivery date D 06/19/200x

Create Order: Initial Screen x

Select SH

4744 Meyer4910 Weber4911 Singer4912 Hart

Las VegasPhoenixPhoenixPhoenix

x

Selection: SP x

Rule B Check customer hierarchy partnersIf the sold-to party in the sales order is different to that in the contract, it can be authorized for release if both customers are nodes in a customer hierarchy and the sold-to party in the release order is on a lower node than the one in the contract.

Alternative ship-to parties are controlled in the same way as in Rule A.Partners authorized to release are only checked at header level.

Page 232: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Contract Data in Sales Documents

Dismantling date:

OrderTab: Contract data

Contract start: 01/07

Installation date:

Acceptance date:

Contract conclusion:

Contract end: 12/31

Requested cancellation date:Canceling party:

Cancellation received:

Sales doc. type: RC

Contract data allowed: X

Sales doc. type: RC Rental contract

Customer: C1

Order header

Item 10

Item 20

IMG

In Customizing for sales document types, you can activate the contract data. Blank No contract dataX Contract data is permitted. Any changes to the contract header are not copied to the items.Y Contract data is permitted. Changes to the contract header are automatically copied to the

items if the header and item data were previously identical. Changes are saved in a log. The log also notes any possible problems and inconsistencies.

You can maintain contract data at both the header and the item level in the sales document. Contract data at header level is valid for all items as long as the data at item level is not different.You can use the date determination rules so that the system automatically finds deadlines relevant to the contract.

Page 233: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Determining Dates

Proposal

RC - Create contract

Contract start: 07/08/2000

Contract end: 07/07/2001Rule 05

Rule 08

Manual entry

Installation date: 07/08/2000

Contract profile 0001

Contract start rule: 05

Contract end rule: 08

Duration: 1 year

Sales doc. type: RC

Contract profile: 0001

Date determination rules:

01 - Today's date02 - Start of contract05 - Installation date08 - End of period12 - Start of contract + 1 week. . .

Cancellation proc.: 0001

IMG

IMG

When you create a contract the system proposes, for example, the start and end dates of the contract.You define the date determination rules in Customizing. These rules start the document on one of the dates that you have set (for example, today's date or installation date). Any interval you specify can also be added to this date. You can also schedule the date for the beginning or end of the month that is determined in this manner. If you specify a duration category, the system automatically generates the duration of the contract. This can be a component of the date rule, for example, for determining the end of the contract.If you assign a contract profile to the sales document type, the system automatically determines default values specific to the contract. These could be:Rules for determining start and end of the contractDuration categorySubsequent activitiesCancellation procedure

Page 234: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Outline Agreements: Summary

You are now able to:

Use different types of outline agreements and theirfunctions

Configure outline agreements in Customizing so thatthey meet your requirements

Page 235: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Unit: Outline Agreements

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Use outline agreements and configure their specific settings in Customizing

• Explain the concept of partners authorized to release

Outline agreements such as quantity, value or rental contracts play an important role in almost every branch of industry. Long-term agreements enable you to use forward planning and special pricing arrangements.

1-1 You have entered into a value contract with customer T-S62A## that is valid for 6 months. Create a contract and indicate the party authorized to release. The materials that are permitted for contract releases will be listed in an assortment module.The customer subsequently calls releases as orders. The system determines the permitted partners and materials for releases from the information stored in the value contract.

1-1-1 Create an assortment module for value contracts. The system assigns a number to the assortment module. You should then enter the description value contract module ## an. The module should be valid until the end of next year. List the materials T-ATB##, T-ATC## and T-ATD##.

Module number: _________________________________

1-1-2 When the system automatically determines item categories, the item category for value contracts is determined by the usage indicator VCTR when an assortment module is specified.

Check in Customizing which item category has been found for sales document type WK1 Value contract – general.

Item category: _________________________________

Page 236: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-3 Display the item category.

Value contract material: _________________________________

1-1-4 Create a value contract for customer T-S62A## with purchase order number ##LO605-WK101 and the description Value contract ##:

Order type: WK1Sold-to party: Customer T-S62A##Authorized SH: Customer T-S62E## Authorized SH: Customer T-S62F##

Valid from: Today until 6 months from todayTarget value: 20,000 UNIAssortment module: see above

1-1-5 Create a release order for the value contract above with purchase order number ##LO605-OR11.

Order type: ORReleasing partner: Customer T-S62A##Ship-to party: Customer T-S62F##

Material: Material T-ATB## (1 unit)Material T-ATC## (1 unit)

1-1-6 Create a second release order with purchase order number ##LO605-OR12.

Order type: ORReleasing partner: Customer T-S62E##Ship-to party: Customer T-S62F##

Material: Material T-ATD## (10 units) What message did you receive when attempting to save?

______________________________________________________

Reduce the quantity to one unit and save.

1-1-7 Determine the total released value for the value contract.

______________________________________________________

1-1-8 Check in the document flow to determine how many release orders exist for the contract.

Total: _________________________________

Page 237: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-9 Optional Where do you determine whether the value contract material should be transferred to the release order or not?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

1-1-10 Optional Which item category settings do you use to control what happens when the target value in the contract is exceeded?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

1-1-11 OptionalWhich partner determination procedure has been assigned to the value contract?

__________________________________________________________

1-1-12 Optional Which partner functions for releasing partners are configured in this procedure?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

Page 238: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 You have entered into a rental contract with customer T-S62D##.

1-2-1 Enter an outline agreement for customer T-S62D## with purchase order number ##LO605-OP01. Do not enter a sales area.

Which sales area was determined?

_________________________________

1-2-2 When you create the rental contract, the system refers to the contract profile for essential contract data. Find the following contact data in the document:

Contract start date rule _________________________________Contract end date rule _________________________________Validity period category _________________________________Contract validity period _________________________________Cancellation procedure _________________________________

Note: The contract data appears on a separate tab page in the document header.

Page 239: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Unit: Outline Agreements

1-1 Value contracts and releases

1-1-1 Create an assortment module Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master data → Products → Value contract assortment module → Create → Button: Items → Enter items → Save

Module number: _________________________________

1-1-2 Check in Customizing which item category has been found for sales document type WK1 Value contract – general.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Contracts→ Value Contract → Assign item category to…

Item category: WKN

1-1-3 Display the item category.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Contracts → Value Contract → Define item categories for value contracts... → Value contract material: WKM1

Page 240: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-4 Create a value contract

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Contract → Create

Contract type: WK1Sold-to party: T-S62A## → Goto → Header → Partner SP Contract rel. order: T-S62E## SH Contract rel. order: T-S62F## → Back Valid from: Today until 6 months from todayTarget value: 20,000 UNIAssortment module: see above

1-1-5 Create a release order for the value contract

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create Order type: TA

Button: Create with reference → Contract tabButton: Selection List Select the releasing sold-to party and ship-to party in the dialog:Releasing sold-to party: T-S62A##Ship-to party: T-S62F##

→ On screen: Selection list for reference document → Button: Expand assortment module → Enter materials and quantities Material: T-ATB## (1 unit)Material: T-ATC## (1 unit)→ BackButton: Copy → Save

Page 241: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-6 Create a second release order. Menu paths: see above

Order type: ORReleasing partner: T-S62E##Ship-to party: T-S62F##

Material: T-ATD## (10 units) What message did you receive when attempting to save?

The target value of the contract has been exceeded.

Button: Edit

Reduce the quantity to one unit and save.

1-1-7 Determine the total released value for the value contract.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Contract → Display

Field: Released value: 6,097.00 UNI

1-1-8 Check in the document flow to see how many release orders exist for the contract.

→ Environment → Display document flow Total: 2

1-1-9 Optional Where do you determine whether the value contract material should be transferred to the release order or not?

→ At item level in copying control

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Contracts

→ Value contract → Copying control for value contractButton: Position Target: OR Source: WK1Dialog structure: ItemField: Contract item copy mode

Page 242: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-10 Optional Which item category settings do you use to control what happens when the target value in the contract is exceeded?

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Contracts

→ Value Contract → Define item categories for value contract…→ Position on WKN Information area: Business dataField: Completion rule Information area: Value contractField: Contract release control

1-1-11 OptionalWhich partner determination procedure has been assigned to the value contract?

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Partner determination → Define partner functions Object: Select the sales document header Button: Partner procedures Button: Procedure assignment Sales document type: WK1 Partner determination procedure: KAB (Contract release)

1-1-12 Optional Which partner functions for releasing partners are configured in this procedure?

→ Back → Select KAB procedure Button: Function details Partner function: AA (SP Contract rel. ord.) Partner function: AW (SH Contract rel. ord.)

Page 243: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 You have entered into a rental contract with customer T-S62D##.

1-2-1 Create a rental contract Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Contract → Create Contract type: OP (rental contract) Which sales area was determined?

1000 / 14 / 00

1-2-2 Find the following contract data in the rental contract:

Tab page: Header – Contract data

Rule for contract start date Today’s date Contract end date Contract end + contract validity period Validity period category 1 year Contract validity period 1 year Cancellation procedure 0001 (Cancellation at end of validity period)

Page 244: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination and Listing / Exclusion

Material determination and

Product selection

Material listing and

Material exclusion

Unit Contents:

Page 245: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination: Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Use the functions for material determination andproduct selection as well as material listing andmaterial exclusion

Explain how to configure Customizing so that thesefunctions meet your needs

Create master records

Understand and analyze the settings for thesefunctions in the sales document

Page 246: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0,-- ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special Business Transactions

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

1. Introduction

Page 247: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination: Business Scenario

Your company offers a wide range of products

For various reasons, you want to regularly replacesome products by others during the sales process

In addition, you want to limit the product rangeavailable to certain customers

Page 248: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Determining Materials

Material enteredMaterial entered Substitute material

Substitute material

OrderItem

10

Material

4711

M14711 M1

Determining materials

Material determination provides you with a tool for automatically exchanging materials in the sales document.The condition technique provides you with greater flexibility in material determination. When you process a document, the system automatically searches for valid master records that you created previously in material determination.You can assign a substitution reason to every master record in material determination that defines how the material should be determined. You define the substitution rules in Customizing. Examples in the standard system include:Substitution reason 0002: Customized materialSubstitution reason 0003: EAN number

You do not need a material master record for the material number that you are replacing.During order entry, the material ordered by the customer is replaced by the substitute defined in the master record. The system now continues processing with the substitute (for example, in the availability check, pricing, delivery, billing).Note: The item overview for Sales A contains information about the material that was originally entered as well as the reason for substitution.

Page 249: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Selecting Products Manually

CustomerCustomergroupgroup

WholesalersWholesalers

CustomerCustomerSmithSmith

1. 47142. 47113. 4712

Customer: MillerProduct: 4712

1. 47112. 47163. 4712

Customer: SmithProduct: 4711

1. 47122. 4716

Customer group: GHProduct: 4711

4711 4712 4713

4714 4715 4716

CustomerCustomerMillerMiller

MaterialsMaterials

Master records fordetermining materials

In some sectors of industry, the same products are sold in different packaging materials (for example, packaging for standard and promotion articles). Material master records exist in the system for managing these stocks. When you enter an order, you can use different material numbers for the same product.We have extended the functions in manual and automatic product selection so that material determination can support this business practice:Reason for substitution 0005: Manual production selection (list of default values)Reason for substitution 0004 / 0006: Automatic product selection (depending on availability

in order and delivery)In manual production selection, (reason for substitution 0005), the system does not automatically replace the product. Instead, it displays a list of all of the substitution materials and other information in the master record. You can then select the required material from this list.To simplify selection, the system displays the material quantities that can be confirmed on the customer's requested delivery date. If a material cannot be confirmed fully for the requested delivery date, the system displays the date on which the material can be completely delivered.

Page 250: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Master Data

Product 4713

Product 4711

Product 471102/01 - 05/01

1. Easter version

2. Standard product

Product 4714

Product 4715

Product 4711

09/09 - 12/31Product 4711

1. Olympic version

2. Christmas packaging

3. Standard product

For material determination/product selection

Maintain the master records for material determination in the master data menu for Sales and Distribution under Products. You can use the condition technique to define the master data for material determination at any level. For example, you can create data records using the material number or a combination of the material and customer numbers. When you process master records, you can:Restrict the validity period of a recordMaintain separate entries for each key combinationDetermine reasons for substitutionSave one or more substitutes per master record

If there is more than one material defined in the master record for material determination / product selection, the sequence in which they appear defines the priority that they have.

Page 251: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Automatic Product Selection

April 1AutomaticAutomaticselectionselection

Product 4712 10 PC

Product: available

4711 10 PC0 PC

June 1AutomaticAutomaticselectionselectionProduct:

available4711 10 PC

4 PC

Product 4711 4 PC

Product 4714 6 PC

Order

Delivery

In automatic product selection (reasons for substitution 0004 and 0006), the system replaces the entered material automatically if it is not available.If automatic product selection is being used, the system may display (based on customizing) the entered and substituted material as main and sub-items in the sales order.When you enter an order, the system tries to fill the quantity of the order with the first material in the material determination master record. If there is not enough of this material, it fills the remaining quantity with the next material.You can choose whether or not you want to re-run material determination when the delivery is created. If material determination is re-run, the result of the substitution may change due to the new availability situation.You can use the product attributes in the material and customer master records to exclude a particular material from product selection. This means, for example, that all the materials that have been rejected in the customer master will not be included by the system when it determines a substitution material.The Partial confirmation of product selection allows you to deal with shortfall cases (in which only the available quantity is confirmed, and it is less than the order quantity) by passing the shortfall quantity on to materials planning. In this case, an additional sub-item is generated with a specifically defined material.

Page 252: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Automatic Product Selection - Master Data

1. A2. B

Examples

Material entered: AIf material A isn't available, it is automatically replacedwith material B.

II

1. D2. C

Material entered: CThe customer orders material C. You want to clear out material D.Material D is selected automatically as long asit is available.

IIII

Master records fordetermining materials

Master records fordetermining materials

The sequence of the substitution materials in the master data influences the result of the automatic product selection in the order.If you want the material that is first entered in the order to be included in the substitution, then you must enter it in the substitutions list.Case A: The original material is in the first place in the list, and its available stock is included in the substitution. The system then refers to the available stock for the next material in the master record.Case B: First, the system uses up the available stock for the materials that appear in the master record before the material that has been entered. Only when these stocks have been used up, does it include that material in the substitution.

Page 253: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination - Condition Technique (1)

Sales doc. type OR

Order

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Material : M-10. . .

Procedure A00001

Page 254: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination - Condition Technique (2)

Sales doc. type OR Procedure A00001

Condition type A001

10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .Order

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Material : M-10. . .

Page 255: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination - Condition Technique (3)

Sales doc. type OR

. . .

Procedure A00001

Condition type A001

Access sequence A002

10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .

Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 12/31/2002

Order

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Material : M-10. . .

Page 256: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination - Condition Technique (4)

Sales doc. type OR

. . .

Procedure A00001

Condition type A001

Access sequence A002

Access:10 2 SlsOrg/DistCh/Ent.mat. Access:20 1 Material entered

10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .

Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 12/31/2002

Order

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Material : M-10. . .

Page 257: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination - Condition Technique (5)

Sales doc. type OR

. . .

Procedure A00001

Condition type A001

Access sequence A002

Access:10 2 SlsOrg/DistCh/Ent.mat. Access:20 1 Material entered

10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .

Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 01/01/2002

Table 2 No record available

Table 1 Successful access

Order

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Material : M-10. . .

Page 258: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination - Condition Technique (6)

Sales doc. type OR

. . .

Procedure A00001

Condition type A001

Access sequence A002

Access:10 2 SlsOrg/DistCh/Ent.mat. Access:20 1 Material entered

10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .

Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 01/01/2002

Table 2 No record available

Table 1 Successful access

Entry: MAT-10Material determination master record

Valid from . . . To . . .Subst.reason: 0002

Substitution material: M-10

Order

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Material : M-10. . .

The condition technique provides more flexibility in modeling material determination and product selection.You can assign a material determination procedure to each sales document type. The procedure contains all of the Customizing information that the system needs for material determination. The procedure includes one or more defined condition typesOne access sequence (search strategy) is assigned to each condition type. Each access sequence consists of one or more accesses.Each access contains exactly one condition table. This represents the search key that the system uses to search for a valid master record.You can activate an analysis of the material determination in the sales document. The system then displays detailed information on how the materials were determined.

Page 259: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material Listing

Sold-to party : S2Payer : R1 Item Material

10 471120 471230 4713

Sold-to party : S1Payer : R1 Item Material

10 471120 471330 4714

Order

Order

Master records formaterial listing

Master records formaterial listing

Customer : S1Material :

47114712

Sold-to party S2Sold-to party S2

Payer P1Payer P1

Sold-to party S1Sold-to party S1

Customer : R1Material :

47114713

Target: You want to make sure that your customer only receives SPECIFIC materials. You enter these materials as a material listing.The material listing is controlled by the condition technique.In the above example, you have created master records with a key for the customer and material numbers. This key is delivered in the standard system. The access sequence for the condition type guarantees that the system searches for valid master records both for the sold-to party and the payer. If the sold-to party is different than the payer in the sales order and if both partners have master records, the system first searches for the sold-to party's master record (first access). If it finds a valid master record, it stops searching even if the material you have entered is not listed. Any records listed for the payer are not taken into account. It the first search is unsuccessful, the system searches for the payer's master record.You can also define your own keys, for example:Customer group/materialCustomer/product hierarchy

You define in the sales document type whether the system checks the material listing or not.

Page 260: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material exclusion

Sold-to party S2Sold-to party S2

Payer P1Payer P1

Sold-to party S1Sold-to party S1 Order

OrderSold-to party : S2Payer : R1 Item Material

10 471120 471230 4713

Sold-to party : S1Payer : R1 Item Material

10 471120 471330 4714

Master records formaterial exclusionMaster records formaterial exclusion

Customer : S1Material :

47114712

Customer : R1Material :

47114713

Target: You want to ensure that the customer does NOT receive certain materials. You enter these materials as a material exclusion.The material exclusion is also controlled with the condition technique.In the above example, you have created master records with a key for the customer and material numbers. This key is delivered in the standard system. The access sequence for the condition type guarantees that the system searches for valid master records both for the sold-to party and the payer. If there is a material exclusion, the access sequence has a different effect than for material listings. If the sold-to party is different than the payer in the sales order and if both partners have master records, the system first searches for the sold-to party's master record (first access). If the system finds a valid master record, the reference to the material is prevented and the system stops searching. It does not check the payer's master record. It the first search is unsuccessful, the system searches for the payer's master record. If the system finds a valid master record, the reference to the material is prevented. You can define whether the material exclusion is checked in the sales document type.

Page 261: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination: Summary

You are now able to:

Use the functions for material determination andproduct selection as well as material listing andmaterial exclusion

Explain how to configure Customizing so that thesefunctions meet your needs

Create master records

Understand and analyze the settings for thesefunctions in the sales document

Page 262: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Unit: Material Determination / Product Selection andMaterial Listing / Material Exclusion

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Explain how to use the material determination and listing / exclusion functions

Customers often need to be able to change materials automatically. For example, they need to be able to substitute a standard product with a promotion material for a certain time period.

In order to avoid delivering the wrong goods, you can create master records where you list the permitted or forbidden materials.

1-1 Starting now, material T-ATA## should automatically replace material T-ATB## for a period of two months.

1-1-1 Create the relevant master record for material determination. Choose determination type A001.

1-1-2 Create a trade fair order (ZA##) order with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##09 for sold-to party T-S62A## and material T-ATB## (1 unit). Verify that the material is replaced automatically.

1-1-3 In which sales document view can you find information about the material entered (and if necessary the reason for substitution)? View: _________________________________

1-2 You would like your employees in sales order processing to be able to call up a selection list for certain products, from which they can then choose a suitable material.

1-2-1 Create a reason for substitution Z## with the description Substitution ## in Customizing. Choose a substitution strategy that allows the selection list.

1-2-2 Enter a material determination master record with the description MONITOR## and reason for substitution Z##. The master record should contain the materials T-ATA##, T-ATB## and T-ATC##. The data record is valid for two months.

Page 263: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2-3 Enter a trade fair (ZA##) order with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##10 for sold-to party T-S62A##. Enter MONITOR## as the material with a quantity of 1 and check the effect on your master record.

1-3 A discussion between your sales department and customer T-S62B## reveals that the customer no longer allowed to purchase materials T-ATF## and T-ATG##.

1-3-1 Enter a condition record for the material exclusion.

1-3-2 Check the effect of this material master record by creating a trade fair order (ZA##) for customer T-S62B## with purchase order number ##605-ZA##11. Try to create an item with materials T-ATA## and T-ATF##.

Which item cannot be created and why?

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

1-4 OptionalA discussion between the sales department and customer T-S62A## reveals that the customer can only use materials T-ATA##, T-ATB## and T-ATC## in production and therefore does not need any other products.

1-4-1 Enter a condition record for the material listing.

1-4-2 Check the effect of this material master record by creating a trade fair order (ZA##) for customer T-S62A## with purchase order number ##605-ZA##12. Try to create an item with materials T-ATA## and T-ATF## for 1 unit of each. Exit without saving.

Which item cannot be created and why?

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

Page 264: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Unit: Material Determination / Product Selection andMaterial Listing / Material Exclusion

1-1 Starting now, material T-ATA## should automatically replace material T-ATB## for a period of two months.

1-1-1 Create a master record for material determination. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Material Determination → Create Material determination type: A001 Ent. material: T-ATB## Material: T-ATA##→ Save → Exit

Note: The validity period of the master record was proposed from the Customizing of condition type A001.

1-1-2 Create an order. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order (order type ZA##) → Create

1-1-3 In which sales document view can you find information about the material entered (and if necessary the reason for substitution)?

View: Item details: Sales A, Field: Entered material

Page 265: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Manual product selection from a selection list

1-2-1 Create a reason for substitution. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Material Determination → Define substitution reasons Button: New entries Reason for substitution: Z##Description: Substitution ## Strategy: A → Save → Exit

1-2-2 Create a master record for material determination. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Material determination → Create Material determination type: A001 Mat. entered: MONITOR## Material: T-ATA##Reason: Z## → Select entry → Goto → Alternative materials → Enter additional materials

1-2-3 Create an order. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order (order type ZA##) → Create

Page 266: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3 Material exclusion

1-3-1 Create a master record for material exclusion. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Listing/exclusion → Create List/excl. type: B001

Customer: T-S62B## → Maintain materials → Save → Exit

1-3-2 Create an order.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order (order type ZA##) → Create

Which item cannot be created and why?

Material T-ATF## cannot be entered in the document.Message: Material T-ATF## has been excluded.

1-4 OptionalMaterial listing

1-4-1 Create a master record for material listing. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Listing/exclusion → Create List/excl. type: A001 → Key combination: Customer/Material

Customer: T-S62A## → Maintain materials → Save → Exit

1-4-2 Create an order.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order (order type ZA##) → Create

Which item cannot be created and why?

Material T-ATF## cannot be entered in the document.Message: Material T-ATF## is not listed and therefore not allowed.

Page 267: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods

Exclusive and inclusive bonus quantities

Master data

Free goods condition technique

Free goods in statistics and Controlling

Unit Contents:

Page 268: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods: Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Use the free goods functions in your salesprocess

Enter master records for exclusive and inclusivebonus quantities

Explain how to configure the Customizingsettings for free goods

Page 269: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special Business Transactions

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

1. Introduction

0,--

Page 270: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods: Business Scenario

Free goods play a large role in the price negotiationswith your customers.

As a result, you want to be able to determine freegoods and place them in the sales documentsautomatically.

Your responsibility is to automate the determinationof free goods, taking into account that certaininformation related to the free goods has to besupplied to Controlling.

Page 271: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Inclusive BQ

One free cart

on

of these

Exclusive and Inclusive Bonus Quantities (1)

Page 272: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Exclusive and Inclusive Bonus Quantities (2)

+Exclusive BQInclusive BQ

One free cart

on

of these

In industry sectors such as retail, the chemicals industry or consumer goods industry, it is common to provide discounts in the form of free goods.Free goods can be part of the order quantity not included in the invoice. This is called an inclusive bonus quantity. The ordered goods and the free goods both involve the same material. The quantity units of the free goods and ordered goods must be the same.Free goods can also take the form of extra goods that are free of charge. These are called exclusive bonus quantities.In exclusive bonus quantities, the extra goods are delivered free of charge and are not typically included in the invoice. This can either be an additional quantity of the goods ordered or it can be another article. The exclusive free goods appear in the SD document as an individual, free-of-charge item.

Page 273: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods in the Sales Order

Order

Sold-to party: C2

Pricing date: May 8

Delivery date: May 15

Item HI Material Quant. ICat

10 Eggs 4 TAN

20 10 Eggs 1 TANN

Item HI Material Quant. ICat

10 Eggs 5 TAN

20 10 Duck 1 TANN

Exclusive BQOrder Inclusive BQ

Sold-to party: C1

Pricing date: May 8

Delivery date: May 15

Both types of free goods are treated in the same way in the sales order. The material that has been ordered is entered as a main item, the free goods material is automatically displayed as a sub-item. The item category determines how the the item is controlled later in the business process (for example, for delivery or pricing). Item categories TAN and TANN are used in the standard SAP system. The system determines them automatically by accessing the relevant condition records. The system then accesses the free goods master record with the pricing date.As in earlier releases, you can also enter free goods by manually entering data in the higher-level item and item category fields (TANN). However in this case, the system does not refer to the free goods master record, and settings such as automatically reducing the quantity of the main item or for the delivery are missing.The system re-reads the free goods master record in the sales order if the quantities in the main item change or if the pricing date changes. The system then deletes the sub-items and re-creates them. Any manual changes to the free goods quantity are lost. If pricing is re-run in the sales order, it does not affect the free goods determination.

Page 274: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Item HI Material Quant. ICat

10 Eggs 5 TAN

Order Inclusive BQ

Sold-to party: C1

Pricing date: May 8

Delivery date: May 15

One-Line Inclusive Bonus Quantity

Conditions

Cart Desc. Amount PR00 Price 15 NRAB Free goods 3-

Quantity: 5 Net: 12 UNI

Net value 12

It is also possible to automatically record inclusive bonus quantities of an item on one line in sales documents (since Release 4.5). There are several advantages to this feature:The customer request is obviousInclusive bonus quantities are possible in structured productsThe availability checks of the two items are not independent of one anotherShipping processing can be streamlinedScale prices for the order quantity can be modeled more easilyThe document volume is reduced

The one-line display also has several disadvantages, however:The free goods quantity is not obvious during order entryThe free goods quantities are not identified in the statistics

To activate one-line inclusive bonus quantities, you must set the flag Inclusive/exclusive bonus quantity in the master record of the free goods to 3: Inclusive bonus quantity without generating item.To implement this type of free goods, a discount is calculated during pricing for the free goods share (condition type NRAB, requirement 059).The free goods quantity is displayed in the order confirmation and the invoice.

Page 275: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods - Master Data

30

SlsOrg DistChan Cust. Material

1000 10 C1 M1

Valid from: July 1 To: October 30

Material Min. At/From Adit. in % ReR LAdd. quantity D

M1 Eggs 20 9 CAR 1 PC 10 1 EM2 Duck 2 Addition

The condition technique is used for free goods. Free goods are generally regarded as a supplement to the pricing agreement for a material.You maintain the free goods in the master records for sales by:Using a different menu entryGoing to Prices and Discounts/surcharges when maintaining the master records

You can define master records for free goods at any level, for example, material, customer / material, price list category / currency / material or customer hierarchy / material.You can restrict master records for one level in many different ways:Validity period: The condition is only valid within this periodLowest quantity: The condition comes into affect when this quantity has been exceededDelivery control: See next pageCalculation type: See following pageScales

You can process different master data with the same key for inclusive and exclusive bonus quantities are the same time. You only need to press a button to switch between the two types of discount.When you enter an exclusive bonus quantity, an extra entry line appears where you can enter the good if it is not the same as the ordered material.

Page 276: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods in Deliveries

Order

Item Material 10 M1 20 M2 NRM2 NR

Customer: C1

Part. delivery

Item Material 10 M1M1 20 M2 NRM2 NR

Customer: C1

Delivery Settings for Free GoodsA delivery takes place...regardless of main item

A Only if main item is partially deliveredB only if main item is completely deliveredC only with (part of) main itemE as part of main item quantity

Part. delivery

Item Material 10 M1M1 20 M2 NRM2 NR

Customer: C1Part. delivery

Item Material 10 M1 20 M2 NRM2 NR

Customer: C1

The free goods are automatically copied into the delivery.Free goods determination does not take place in the delivery.Once partial deliveries have been shipped, you cannot change any quantities or dates in the order. It this data changes, the order item has to be rejected and re-entered.In the master record for the free goods, you can fine-tune the delivery settings for the free goods. The following five options are available: The free goods item is processed independently of the main itemA The free goods can be delivered if part of the ordered quantity is being delivered B The free goods can be delivered if the ordered quantity is being completely deliveredC The free goods can only be delivered with at least some of the ordered goodsE Changes to the ordered material in the delivery automatically mean that the quantity of

free goods delivered changes in proportion

Page 277: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods - Calculation Rule

Rule 1: Prorated

Rule 2: Related to units

Rule 3: Whole units

Rule ##: Your own rule

When you specify a calculation rule, you decide how the system determines the free goods quantity from the additional and document quantities.The free goods quantity is the quantity that is calculated from the discount quantity (not the minimum quantity).The additional quantity is the quantity delivered free-of-charge.The document quantity is the quantity entered by the person creating the sales order.

Three calculation rules are provided in the standard system. The following example describes how they work:

You offer supply 20 units of free goods for a free goods quantity of 100 units. The customer orders 162 units (document quantity).Rule 1 prorated: 32 units free goods [ 162*(20/100) = rounded down ]Rule 2 unit-related: 20 units free goods [ 100*(20/100) = rounded down ]Rule 3 whole units: 0 units free goods [ 162 is not a complete unit of 100]

Calculation rules are stored in the system in the form of ABAP/4 code. You can also define your own rules (transaction VOFM, under menu entry, formulas).

Page 278: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods - Statistics and Controlling

QuantityPriceDiscountVPRSRevenue Sales ded. CostsCO

SD

Examples for Transferring Information to CO-PA

10 1100 40 5100 40 5

MI SI

SAPStandard

1

10 1100 20 - 20 40 5100 20 - 20 40 5

MI SI

TANN• Pricing: B• FG100 w/ req. 55

2

10 1100 45 100 45

MI SI

LF ⇒ F1TANN• No pricing

3

You can see detailed information about free goods in the Profitability Analysis and Statistics.The revenues, sales deductions and costs of free goods can be transferred to Profitability Analysis (CO-PA) in different ways, shown in the examples below. (MIt = main item, SIt = sub-item)Scenario 1 (SAP standard system)MIt : Not influenced by free goods SIt: Pricing de-activated, calculation price (VPRS) configured as costs.Scenario 2MIt : Not influenced by free goods SIt: Pricing for item category TANN active with setting B (in the costing procedure, condition type FG100 calculates a 100% discount through requirement 55 at level 819), discount reduces revenues, the transfer price is set as the costs.Scenario 3MIt : Cumulation of calculation price for lower-level item configured at main item level (in copying control Delivery -> Billing document), accumulated clearing price set as costs,SIt:

Pricing deactivated

Page 279: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods - Condition Technique

Table 05 ⇒ No record availableTable 10 ⇒ Successful access

Sales area 1000 10 00Doc. procedure ACust. procedure 1

10 1 NA00 Free goods. . .

Access seq. Valid from To

Access:10 05 MaterialAccess:20 10 SlsOrg/DistCh/Cust./Mat.

1000 10 C1 M1 ... ... ... ... ... ...

Order

1

2

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Main item TAN

Sub-item TANN

Condition records

Access sequence NA00

Condition type NA00

Procedure NA0001

The condition technique provides greater flexibility for using the free goods functions.The system uses the information about the sales areas, document determination procedure (from the sales document type) and customer determination procedure (from the customer master) to determine the free goods determination procedure.The procedure contains a list of the condition types for the free goods.One access sequence (search strategy) is assigned to each condition type. Each access sequence consists of one or more accesses.Each access contains exactly one condition table. This represents the search key that the system uses to search for a valid master record.If the search is successful, the system generates a sub-item for the free goods in the document. The item category is assigned with the item category usage FREE. Pricing for both items is controlled with the item category as normal.You can activate an analysis of the free goods determination in the sales document. The system then displays detailed information on how the free goods were determined.

Page 280: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods: Unit Summary

You are now able to:

Use the free goods functions in your salesprocess

Enter master records for exclusive and inclusivebonus quantities

Explain how to configure the Customizingsettings for free goods

Page 281: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Unit: Free Goods

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Create different master records for free goods

• Explain how free goods affect the sales process

• Describe how to control the free goods

You can extend pricing by using free goods in the form of exclusive and inclusive bonus quantities.

You make the relevant agreements with your customer.

These will be automatically controlled by the R/3 System in the document when you enter a sales order.

1-1 You have agreed on a price reduction for customer T-S62A## in the form of free goods.

1-1-1 Create a free goods master record (free goods type NA00) for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10. If the customer orders at least 20 units of material T-ATC##, 10% of the purchased quantity should be free of charge. The free-of charge material should be a proportion of the quantity in the higher-level item.

1-1-2 Create a trade fair order (ZA##) with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##13 for customer T-S62A## and Material T-ATC##. The purchase order quantity is 10 units.

What message appears?

____________________________________________________________

1-1-3 Increase the quantity to 40 units. What are the quantities in the higher-level and sub-items?

Main item: _________________________________Sub-item: _________________________________

Page 282: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 You make another free goods agreement with customer T-S62E## for material T-ATD##. The minimum order quantity is 20 units. You want to deliver one free-of-charge unit of material T-ATA## for each 20 units ordered.

1-2-1 Create the relevant master record for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10.

1-2-2 In the record, indicate that the system only determines the quantity of the free-of-charge material in multiples of the free goods quantity.

1-2-3 Indicate that if the ordered quantity changes in the delivery, then the free-of-charge quantity should change in proportion.

1-2-4 Create a trade fair order (ZA##) with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##14 for customer T-S62E## and Material T-ATD##. The purchase order quantity is 40 units.

1-2-5 Complete the order and deliver it (shipping point: 1200, selection date: one month from today). Increase the delivery quantity to 80 units. What happens to the free-of-charge item?

____________________________________________________________

1-3 OptionalThe system automatically created a free goods sub-item for the order with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##14. The system runs pricing for this sub-item even though it is free of charge.

1-3-1 Which item category did the system find for the sub-item and which key did it use?

Item category: _________________________________Key: _________________________________

1-3-2 Which settings in Customizing affect pricing for the free-of-charge item?

____________________________________________________________

1-3-3 Which entry in the pricing procedure ensures that the item remains free of charge although the system ran pricing?

_________________________________

Page 283: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Unit: Free Goods

1-1 You have agreed on a price reduction for customer T-S62A## in the form of free goods.

1-1-1 Create a master record for free goods. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Conditions → Free goods → Create Free goods type: NA00

Customer: T-S62A##

Material: T-ATC##Minimum quantity: 20From: 10 Unit of measure: STare free goods: 1Unit of measure: PCCalculation type (CalT): 1Delivery control (L): Blank Note: The validity period of the master record was proposed from the Customizing of condition type A001.

1-1-2 Order

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order (order type ZA##) → Create

What message appears?

Minimum quantity of 20 PC of free goods has not been reached.

1-1-3 Increase the quantity to 40 units. What are the quantities in the higher-level and sub-items?

Main item: 36 unitsSub-item: 4 units

Page 284: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 You make another free goods agreement with customer T-S62E## for material T-ATD##.

1-2-1 Create a free goods master record. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Conditions → Free goods → Create Free goods type: NA00

Button: Exclusive Customer: T-S62E## Material: T-ATD##Minimum quantity: 20 Free goods qty: 20Unit of measure: STAdditional free goods: 1Unit of measure: PC Additional material: T-ATA##

1-2-2 Calculation type

Calculation type (CaIT): 2

1-2-3 Delivery control

Delivery control (L): E

1-2-4 Create an order. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order (order type ZA##) → Create

1-2-5 Complete and deliver the order → Sales document → Deliver → The free-of-charge quantity is doubled to 4 units.

Page 285: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3 OptionalPricing for free goods

1-3-1 Which item category did the system find for the sub-item and which key did it use?

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order (order type ZA##) → Create Item category: TANN

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Free Goods→ Determine item category for the free goods item

Key: ZA## / NORM / FREE / blank

1-3-2 Which settings in Customizing affect pricing for the free-of-charge item?

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Free Goods→ Control Free Goods Pricing → Control pricing for free goods item category…

Item category: Pricing: B Pricing Free goods (100% discount)

1-3-3 Which entry in the pricing procedure ensures that the item remains free of charge although the system ran pricing?

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Free Goods → Control Free Goods Pricing → Maintain pricing procedure for pricing → Procedure RVAA01 → Button: Control → Button: Position → Step number: 399

Condition type: R100 100% discount

Page 286: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1

SAP AG 1999

Appendix

This unit contains extra materials to be used forreference purposes

This material is not part of the standard course

As a result, the material might not be used duringthe course

Page 287: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Appendix: Contents

Table structures

Matchcode objects

Authorization objects

Delivery block

Special features of contracts

Group master contracts

Menu paths

IDES data

Page 288: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Table Structure for Customers - SD View

KNVK KNVA KNVS

KNVP KNVD KNVL

KNA1

KNVV KNVI

These tables contain the following information:KNA1: Customer master, general informationKNVK: Contact personsKNVV: Customer master, sales areaKNVA: Unloading pointsKNVI: Tax indicatorsKNVP: Partner functionsKNVD: DocumentsKNVL: LicensesKNVS: Shipping data

Logical database for customer master:DD F: Customer database

Page 289: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

KNVH

Table Structure for Customer Hierarchies

This table contains customer hierarchies. You create customer hierarchy nodes as customer master data.

Page 290: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Table Structure for Materials

MCHB

MCHA MLGT

MAPRMVERMBEW MLGNMARC

MAKT MARM MVKE MLAN MAEX

MARA

MCH1

MARD

These tables contain the following information:MARA: General material dataMAKT: Short textsMARM: Conversion factorsMVKE: Sales data (for each sales organization and distribution channel)MLAN: Sales data (for each country)MAEX: Export licensesMARC: Plant dataMBEW: Valuation dataMLGN: Warehouse management inventory dataMLGT: Warehouse management inventory type dataMVER: Consumption dataMAPR: Pointers for forecast dataMARD: Storage location dataMCH1: Cross-plant batches MCHA: BatchesMCHB: Batch stocks

Logical database for material master:CKM: Material masterMSM: Material master

Page 291: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Table Structure for Customer - Material Information

KNMT

KNMTK

These tables contain the following information:KNMTK: Header table

for increased performanceKNMT: Data table

Page 292: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Table Structure for Bills of Material

STZUSTKO

STAS

STPO

STPU

MAST TPSTEQST STSTKDST DOST

These tables contain the following information:MAST Material assignment to BOMEQST Equipment assignment to BOMKDST Sales order assignment to BOMDOST Document assignment to BOMSTST Standard object assignment to BOMTPST Functional location assignment to BOMSTKO BOM header dataSTZU Time-independent STL dataSTAS BOM item selectionSTPO BOM item dataSTPU BOM sub-item data

Page 293: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Table Structure for Sales Activities

VBFA

SADR STXL

VBUV VBPA NAST STXH

VBKA

VBUK

These tables contain the following information:VBUK: Header status and administrative dataVBKA Sales activityVBUV: Incompleteness logVBPA: SD document: PartnerSADR: AddressVBFA: SD document flowsNAST: OutputSTXH: Texts: HeaderSTXL: Texts: Lines

Logical database:AK V: Sales documents

Page 294: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Document Tables - Header

STXH/STXLTexts

VBUKHeader status

VEDAContract

VMVAMatchcodes

NASTOutput

PP-StatusJSTO

VBAKHeader

VBKDBusiness data

VEPAPartners

VAKPAPartner indexes

VBUVIncompleteness

VBFADocument flows

These tables contain the following information:VBUK: Header status and administrative dataVBAK: Sales document: Header dataVBKD: Sales document: Business DataVAKPA: Partner indexVEDA: ContractVBPA: PartnerVBUV: Incompleteness logVBFA: SD document flowsVMVA: MatchcodesSTXH: Texts: HeaderSTXL: Texts: LinesNAST: OutputJSTO: PP status

Page 295: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Document Tables - Item

VBKDBusiness data

VEDAContract

VBLBForecast dlv. sched.

VBEPSettings

VBUVIncompleteness

VBFADocument flows

VBPAPartners

JSTOPP status

VBBE/SRequirements

VBUPStatus

VEPVGShipping index

KONVConditions

VAPMAMaterial index

VMVAMatchcodes

STXH/STXLTexts

NASTOutput

CO object

Variants

Technical objects

Services

VBAPItem

These tables contain the following information:VBUP: Item statusVBAP: Sales document: Item dataVBKD: Sales document: Business DataVEBA: ContractVBLB: Forecast delivery schedulesVBEP: Sales document: Schedule lineVBBE: Individual requirementsVBBS: Summarized requirementsVBUV: Incompleteness logVBFA: SD document flowsVBPA: PartnerJSTO: PP statusNAST: OutputSTXH: Texts: HeaderSTXL: Texts: LinesKONV: Conditions

Page 296: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Index Tables

VBKOF

VBKPA

VAKPA

VLKPA

VRKPA

VEPVG

VKDFS

VAPMA

VLPMA

VRPMA

VAKGU

VMVA

VMVL

VMCF

VMCR

VBSG

VBFA

VBKOF: SD index: Open sales activities for partner functionsVBKPA: SD index: Sales activities for partner functionsVAKPA: SD index: Sales orders for partner functionsVLKPA: SD index: Deliveries - Partner functionsVRKPA: SD index: Billing documents - Partner functionsVAPMA: SD index: Order items - MaterialVLPMA: SD index: Delivery items - MaterialVRPMA: SD index: Billing items - MaterialVAKGU: SD index: Validity of inquiries and quotationsVEPVG: Shipping due index:VKDFS: SD index: Billing triggerVBFA: SD document flowsVMVA: Matchcode object: Sales documentsVMVL: Matchcode object: DeliveriesVMCF: Matchcode object: Billing documentsVMCR: Matchcode object: Invoice listsVBSG: Matchcode object: SD document groups

Page 297: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Customer Matchcodes

Tables

General

Example

Table

Matchcode objectMatchcode object

Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs

Primary table: KNA1Secondary tables: KNVV

KNVPKNVK

Customer matchcodesDEBI

A Customers - generalS Customers by sales group

etc.

All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object.Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables.Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields are used for setting up a search termMatchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot be changed.

Page 298: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Contact Partners - Matchcodes

Tables

General

Example

Primary table: KNVKMatchcodes forcontact persons

VKNK

A Contact persons at customerN Contract persons by name

etc.

Table

Matchcode objectMatchcode object

Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs

All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object.Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables.Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields are used for setting up a search termMatchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot be changed.Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

Page 299: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material Matchcodes

Example

Tables

General

Primary table: MARASecondary tables: MAKT

MVKEMARCetc.

Material matchcodesMAT1

M Search by descriptionS Sales material for descriptionK Search by classetc.

Table

Matchcode objectMatchcode object

Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs

All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object.Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables.Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields are used for setting up a search termMatchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot be changed.Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

Page 300: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Bill of Material Matchcodes

Tables

General

Example

Primary table: STZUBOM matchcodes

STZ1

E Equipment by BOM groupM Material by BOM group

etc.

Table

Matchcode objectMatchcode object

Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs

All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object.Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables.Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields are used for setting up a search termMatchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot be changed.Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

Page 301: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Activity Matchcodes

Tables

General

Example

Primary table: VBUKSecondary tables: VBKA

Matchcode objectVMVK

A Sales activities by code

Table

Matchcode objectMatchcode object

Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs

All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object.Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables.Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields are used for setting up a search termMatchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot be changed.Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

Page 302: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales Order Matchcodes

Tables

General

Example

Matchcode object

Matchcode IDs

Primary table: VBUKSecondary tables: VBKA

Matchcode objectVMVK

A Sales docs by PO numberC Unconfirmed orders

Table

Matchcode objectMatchcode object

Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs

All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object.Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables.Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields are used for setting up a search termMatchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot be changed.Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

Page 303: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Authorization Objects - Customer Masters

Field groups

Sales area

Authorization group

Customer master

The authorization group is a four-character, alphanumeric field that you maintain in the customer master.Maintain authorization objects for the customer master from the Sales view (sales area and authorization group) in the Sales and Distribution authorization class. You can combine as many fields from the customer master as required using field groups. You can define these groups in the 'Logistics general' chapter in the IMG. Maintain the authorization object itself, however, in the Accounting class. Here you will find additional authorization objects for the customer master from the Accounting view, for example company code authorization.For detailed information on authorization objects, see the node on authorization management in the Sales and Distribution section of the IMG.

Page 304: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Authorization Objects - Material Masters

Material master - Maintenance status

Control record/Period closing program

Company code

Warehouse no. Sales organization/ Distribution channel

Plant

Material master

33

0010001 0002

Maintain the authorization objects by going to Materials Management -> Master data.For detailed instructions on authorization objects, see the Implementation Guide.

Page 305: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Authorization Objects - Bills of Materials

Authorization group

Bill of material category BOM usage

Plant

Bills of material

Collective changes Change withoutchange number

The authorization group is a four-character, alphanumeric field that you maintain in the BOM header.Maintain authorization objects for bills of materials in the authorization class for Production Planning.

Page 306: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Authorization Objects - Sales Activities

Employee as partner in sales activity

Activity types and organizational units

Sales activities

There is exactly one authorization object per sales activity that contains both the sales activity type as well as the following organizational units: sales organization, distribution channel, division, sales office and sales group. You can maintain the authorization objects for the CAS sales activity in the Sales and Distribution authorization class. A particular enhancement for maintenance of authorization objects is available in the Sales Support area.Even if an authorization object has no authorization, you can still grant maintenance or display authorization to certain employees for individual transactions. In Customizing, assign the special function for the personnel partner type and the permitted activity to the sales activity. If an employee is stored as a partner with this specified role in the sales activity, s/he can then implement these activities.In this way you can define, for example, that the Key Account Manager may display all the customer sales activities, for which s/he is maintained as responsible employee. This is possible although the employee does not have authorization for processing documents in the corresponding organizational units. Note:You can find the assignment between employee and partner number in the personal master data. Here you can assign an SAP User ID to a personnel number.

Page 307: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Authorization Objects - Sales Document Types

Sales doc. type

1. Sales document types

2. Sales organization

There are two authorization objects for sales document types:1. Sales document type and actions (create, change, display)

2. Sales organization, distribution channel, division, actionsMaintain authorization objects for sales document types in the authorization class for Sales and Distribution.

Page 308: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Delivery block

Blockgoods issue

Block deliverydue list

Block sales orders

Blockrequirements

Block printing

Block picking

STOP

Delivery blocks are used to take certain processes out of the normal procedure for particular reasons (such as political instability, insufficient stock, payment difficulties) and to prevent any further automatic processing. This means that the procedure stops until the employee responsible can clarify the situation and decide on what to do, at which point s/he can deactivate the delivery block manually.You can define delivery blocks in sales documents at header, item, or schedule line level. The block at item level represents a default value for the schedule line(s) of that item.You can also set delivery blocks directly in sales document types or schedule line categories. When you create sales documents, the corresponding blocks are then set automatically at header or schedule line level.Customizing the blocking reasons in shipping (transactions OVLS, OVLX) controls the effect of the delivery blocks. At header level, you can control whether the blocking reason prevent you from creating a delivery at all or whether certain steps in the sales process are blocked. The delivery of sales documents that are blocked at the header level is only prevented when the blocking reason is assigned to the delivery type in Customizing (transaction OVLX). If no assignment is defined, the delivery can be created. The blocking reason then has different effects on the different steps in the sales process. The settings in transaction OVLS determine which individual steps are affected: (Blocks: order / picking / requirements / goods receipt / printing / delivery due list).In contrast, a block set at the schedule line level always blocks that schedule line for delivery, regardless of the controls described above.

Page 309: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Cancellation

Yes

Accept cancellation date?

Next possiblecancellation date:

03/31/200xManual input

Sales document / Contract data

Cancellation

Cancellation received: 10/01/200x

Contract start: 04/01/2000Contract end: 03/31/2010

Req. cancellation date: 11/01/200x

Contracts are frequently extended beyond the original contract duration if one of the contract partners has not cancelled it beforehand.Example:The contract begins on April 1st. On October 1st, the customer gives notice to cancel for November 1st. However, because the contract cannot be cancelled before the end of its first year, the system issues a warning. You should accept the next possible cancellation date or enter a different one manually. For processing the cancellation of regularly extended contracts, you can define a cancellation procedure that contains one or more cancellation rules. The cancellation procedure can be stored in the contract profile and therefore be controlled as a default value in new contracts.

Page 310: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Customizing for Cancellations

Cancellation rule 0001 Canc. up to 1 wk after start

Contract profile0001

Cancellation procedure

Cancellation procedure

AssignmentCanc.procedure Canc. rule

00010001

Cancellation date 02

Time limit:Unit of time:

Canc. period: 1Unit of time: 1 day

Rule valid for: 12

0001

0001 01/01/98 - 12/31/2007

00010002

You can define cancellation rules to meet your requirements. They contain the date rule for determining the cancellation date, cancellation notice period and the validity period for the rule.Example:In the example above the customer can cancel the contract within a week. Within this period, he or she can cancel it daily (that is, at any point in the week).Another cancellation rule could determine that the cancellation has to take place annually with a notice period of three months before the next cancellation date.

Page 311: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Grouping Contracts

Contract 2334

Material ValueM3 5PC 5 000 UNI5 000 UNIM7 1PC 2 300 UNI2 300 UNI

Customer: Smith Inc.Duluth

Contractalreadyfulfilled

Contract 2376

Material ValueM2 5PC 3 000 UNI3 000 UNIM4 1PC 1 300 UNI1 300 UNI

Customer: Smith Inc.San Fran.

Contract 2378

Material ValueM2 4PC 5 300 UNIM5 1PC 230 UNI

Customer: Smith Inc.London

Consistent?

VBKD

VBPA

VBAK FPLN

VEDA

Master contract

Lower-level contractsDoc. Description2334 Smith Duluth2376 Smith San Fran.2378 Smith New York

Customer: Smith AG HeadquartersValidity: 01/98- 12/98

GrpRefProced: SDGK

In companies that use a substantial number of contracts for their business, several contracts will often be subject to the same business requirements. You can store these requirements in a master contract and link it to lower-level contracts. The master contract contains general conditions that are valid for all the lower-level contracts that refer to it. This ensures that the general data in all the lower-level contracts is consistent. In the standard system, sales document type GK is set up as the master contract. The group contract only contains header data. There are no items in a group contract. You can use fields from tables in the document header (VBAK), business data (VBKD), partner data (VBPA), contract data (VEDA) and the data from the billing plan header (FPLA). The group master contract displays a list of all the links to lower-level contracts. You can then go to the individual contracts from the list.If you activated the Update lower-level contract field in Customizing for master contracts, any changes in your master contract are immediately copied into the lower-level contracts. This triggers a workflow that accesses all the individual lower-level contracts. If any errors occur, the person who changed the master contract receives a workitem for manual processing.

Page 312: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Grouping Contracts - Lower-Level Contracts

Lower-level contracts

Groupcontract:

Customer: Smith AGHeadquarters

Validity: 01/98- 12/98

Document: 3167

4000167Header fields are copied

according to thereferencing procedure

Procedure: SDGK

The lower-level contract is a standard document that contains a reference to the master contract.When you enter the document number in the master contract field, a link is created to the lower-level contract.The link means that the system copies all the relevant fields (set in Customizing) from the master contract to the current lower-level contract. In the referencing requirements, you can control which fields and contract types are permitted for the link.Each time an entry is confirmed, the system checks the reference between the master and lower-level contracts with the rules defined in Customizing for the individual fields.

Page 313: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Referencing Requirements

Table Field name Function Rule MessageVBPA KUNNR SP A VEDA VLAUFZ A

VBAK AUGRU C VBKD INCO1 B

Doc. type of lower-level cont. Doc. type of group contractTarget Source

MC Maintenance contract GC Group contract

Maintain reference sales document types

Define referencing procedures (SDGK)

Customizing for master contracts takes place in two steps:1. Define which contract types are permitted as lower-level contracts for the master contract. For

example, you can configure the settings so that only maintenance contracts can link to master contract MC.

2. Define and configure all the fields needed for the reference in the referencing procedure. For each field, choose one of the three following rules:Rule A - Unique fieldThe link is only possible if the fields in the master and lower-level contracts are identical.Rule B - Copying fieldThe system copies the values in these fields from the master contract to the lower-level field. Different values in the lower-level contract are not permitted.Rule C - Proposal fieldThese fields are only copied from the master contract to the referenced lower-level fields if the data agreed before the master contract was changed. They can be overwritten in the lower-level contract. You can activate a message for each field in the referencing procedure that informs you in the lower-level contract of any changes caused by changes in the master contract.

In Customizing for contracts, you can activate the function Message: Master contract.

Page 314: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Frequently Used Menu Paths

Activity Menu path

Master data Logistics Sales and distribution Master data

Display sold-to party Business partner Customer Display

Display material Products Material Other material Display

Display bill of material Products Bills of Material Bill of Material Material BOM

Display

Display condition records (prices, discounts/surcharges, free goods, etc.)

Conditions Display

Display output master records Output Sales document Display

Customer-Material-Information Agreements Customer-Material Info Display

Order processing

Logistics Sales and distribution Sales

Create/change/display order Order Create/Change/Display

Create/change/display inquiry Inquiry Create/Change/Display

Create/change/display quotation Quotation Create/Change/Display

Create/change/display scheduling agreement Scheduling agreement Create/Change/Display

Create/change/display contract Contract Create/Change/Display

Display list of orders Information system Orders List of sales documents

Display list of incomplete orders Information system Orders List of incomplete orders

Shipping Logistics Sales and distribution Shipping and Transportation

Page 315: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Create/change/display delivery Outbound delivery Create/Change/Display

Create transfer order Picking Create transfer order Single Document

Post goods issue Post goods issue Outb. delivery Single Document

Billing Logistics Sales and distribution Billing

Create/change/display billing document Billing document Create/Change/Display

Display financial accounting documents Billing document Display Accounting overview

Page 316: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Customizing

Access Tools AcceleratedSAP Customizing Project editing Display SAP Reference IMG

Define organizational units

Enterprise structure Definition

Maintain sales organization Sales and Distribution Define sales organization ...

Define, copy, delete, check Sales Organization

Maintain distribution channel Sales and Distribution Define distribution channel ...

Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel

Maintain division Logistics - General Define division ... Define, copy, delete, check division

Maintain sales office Sales and Distribution Maintain sales office

Maintain sales group Sales and Distribution Maintain sales office

Assign organizational units

Enterprise structure Assignment

Sales organization – Company code Sales and Distribution Assign sales Organization - Assign sales organization to company code

Sales organization – Distribution channel Sales and Distribution Assign distribution channel to sales organization

Sales organization – Division Sales and Distribution Assign division to sales organization

Sales area Sales and Distribution Set up sales area

Page 317: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Sales area – Sales office Sales and Distribution Sales office – Sales area

Sales office – Sales group Sales and Distribution Sales group - Assign sales office to sales group

Sales organization – distribution channel - Plant

Sales and Distribution Assign sales Organization - Distribution channel – plant

Master data Display SAP Reference IMG

Common distribution channels Sales and Distribution Master data Define common distribution channels

Common divisions Sales and Distribution Master data Define common divisions

Maintain account group Logistics – General Business Partner Customers Control Define account groups and field selection for customers

Maintain material type Logistics – General Material master Basic settings Material types Define attributes of material types

Basic functions Sales and Distribution Basic Functions

Define pricing procedure Pricing Pricing Control

Define free goods procedure Free Goods Condition Technique for Free Goods

Define output Output Control Output Determination Output Determination using Condition Technique ...

Define material determination procedure Material Determination ...

Define listing/exclusion procedure Listing/Exclusion ...

Partner determination Partner determination

Incompleteness procedure Incompleteness ...

Sales document control

Sales and distribution Sales Sales documents

Header Define sales document types Sales document header Define sales document types

Restrict sales document types to organizational units

Sales document header Assign sales area to sales document types

Page 318: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Item Define item category Sales document item Define item categories

Assign item category Sales document item Assign item categories

Sched. line Define schedule line categories Schedule lines Define schedule line categories

Assign schedule line categories Schedule lines Assign schedule line categories

Copyingcontrol

Sales and Distribution Sales Maintain copying control for sales documents

Contracts Define value contracts Contracts Value contracts ...

Define contract data Contracts Contract data ...

Shipping Logistics Execution Shipping

Determine shipping points Basic Shipping Functions Shipping and Goods Receiving Point Determination

Document control in shipping Deliveries ...

Set up delivery blocks Deliveries Define reasons for blocking in Shipping

Lean WM Picking Lean WM ...

Billing Sales and Distribution Billing

Define billing document types Billing documents Define billing types

Set up billing blocks Billing documents Define blocking reasons in Billing

Copying control for billing documents Billing documents Maintain copying control for billing documents

Maintain requirements and forms

Sales and Distribution System Modification Routines ...

Page 319: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Data Used in the Exercises

Organizational units

Data Training system

IDES system Comments

Company code 1000 1000

Sales area 1000/10/00 1000/10/00

Z000/Z0/00 1000/10/00 Additionally configured

Plant 1000 1000

1200 1200

Shipping point 1200 1200

Account group

Data Training system

IDES system Comments

Account group ZK## 0001 External number assignment

You must allow assignment of the new account group to partner functions AG, WE, RG, and RE in partner control.

Page 320: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Sales doc. type

Data Training system

IDES system Comments

Order type ZA## OR

Customer master

Training system

IDES system Comments

T-S62A## 2006 AccGrp: 0001SA: 1000/10/00

T-S62B## 2007 AccGrp: 0001SA: 1000/10/00

T-S62C## 2006 AccGrp: ZK##SA: 1000/10/00

T-S62D## 1172 AccGrp: 0001SA: 1000/14/00

T-S62E## 2006 AccGrp: 0001SA: 1000/10/00

T-S62F## 2006 AccGrp: 0002SA: 1000/10/00

Legend:AccGrp: Account groupSA: Sales area (Sales organization/Distribution

channel/Division)

Personnel master record

Data Training system

IDES system Comments

Personnel master record 1701## 1701

Page 321: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Material master

Training system

IDES system

Comments

T-ATA## M-10 MtType: HAWA Industry: MPlant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

T-ATB## M-11 MtType: HAWA Industry: MPlant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

T-ATC## M-12 MtType: HAWA Industry: MPlant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

T-ATD## M-13 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1000 SL: 1000/10Plant 1200

T-ATE## M-14 MtType: HAWA Industry: MPlant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

T-ATF## R-1120 MtType: HAWA Industry: MPlant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

T-ATG## R-1130 MtType: HAWA Industry: MPlant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

T-FUA## R-1001 MtType: FERT Industry: MPlant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

T-ZSA## I1000 MtType: DIEN Industry: MPlant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

SL: 1000/14WKM1 New MtType: HAWA Industry: M

Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10MtItem: VCIT

Legend:MtType: Material typeSL: Sales line (sales organization/distribution channel)MtItem: Item category group

To enter sales documents with these materials, perform the following steps:1. Maintain the material prices2. Post stocks (movement type 561) or

Check the availability with replenishment time (for example, checking group 01)3. Enter the new material, WKM1, as a value contract material in Customizing of item

category WKN.

Page 322: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Service Order

Page 323: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Many companies not only sell their products, but alsoinstall and maintain them.

In the following scenario, it is your job to implement aservice process in your company, IDES. You will needthe SD functions in the R/3 Standard System, as yourcompany does not use the Customer Service moduleyet.

Service Order - Business Scenario

Page 324: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

The request for arepair is created in

the system as aservice order.

Before the PC techniciantravels to the customer,

he takes the requiredparts from the repairs

workshop.

Order

Customer: 2738

1000 / 10 / 00

10 PC is toast

Order no.: 5718

A PC technicianis notified by

automatic mail

MailMail

Service Order - Order Before Repairs

A customer phones the service department to request a repair. The employee enters the details in the relevant repair order, including the customer number and a text item describing the repair. The employee can enter any particular details (such as type of repair, replacement parts, address) specified by the customer.Only complete documents can be saved and they must contain the name of a technician. When the order is saved, the technician automatically receives a message informing him of the repair that needs to be done.A special repairs warehouse contains all the necessary replacement parts and a toolbox. Before the technician leaves, he or she ensures that they have the necessary equipment.

Page 325: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

The service and the resulting expenditure areentered in the order.

Order

Customer: 2738

10 3 h rep.20 Hotel30 Trip40 Battery 1 pc

Service Order - Order After Repairs

When the technician has finished the repairs, he or she fills in a form detailing the hours required for the repairs, the hotel, travel costs and the spare parts used.Any unused material is sent back to the repairs workshop.The information in this form is used to enter all services and materials in the order. As the material specified in the document has already been used, an availability check and transfer of requirements are not required.An automatic billing block in the order prevents a billing document from being created too early. The document is not unblocked until all the items have been entered.

Page 326: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Picking is not required. Goods issue is postedautomatically e.g. at the

end of each day.

Delivery

Customer: 2738

1000 10 00

10 1 battery

Del. no: 80002412

The delivery containsthe materials used.

XService Order - Delivery

Inventory management has to be updated because materials were used. Once all the items have been entered in the order, a delivery can be created and goods issue posted.The goods do not need to be picked because they have already been taken from the repairs warehouse.Goods issue can be posted manually for a single delivery or automatically in collective processing.

Page 327: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

An invoicecontains all itemsto be billed andcan be created

automatically bycollective

processing.

Invoice

Customer: 2738

10 3 h repair20 Hotel30 Trip40 Battery 1 pc

Billing blockremoved from

order?

Service Order - Billing Document

By the time the complete order has been posted, the materials have already been delivered so the order quantity is always the same as the goods issue quantity. This allows the system to create an order-related billing document. Note: The relevant settings must have been configured in copying control.All the items in a billing document can be billed together because the billing document for service and material items is related to the order.Billing documents can be created manually for single orders or automatically in collective processing, for example, during the night.

Page 328: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Create a new sales document type

Configure individual item categories for order anddelivery

Assign suitable schedule line categories to the process

Extend copying controls

Add the business partner "PC technician" into theprocess

Create automatic output to inform the technician of thecommissioned repairs

Create a text type that can contain special requirementsfor repairs.

Test the service order

Service Order - Tasks

Page 329: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Scenario: Service Order

• Set up a new document type

• Create service order items

• Set up a partner for the technician

• Create an automatic mail

• Set up copying control

• Test the process

Your company offers maintenance and repair services for computer equipment. To do this, your staff sometimes visits your customers’ sites. The Service Management (SM) component is not used by your company.

One of your customers informs you by telephone that they are having problems with their computer. An experienced employee decides that the problem has to be solved by a technician at the site and decides which spare parts they will need. The technician is automatically informed. He owns a "spare parts" tool box which he fills by taking parts from the warehouse. The order confirmation contains the service (for example, technician category, hours taken) and a reminder that the dollar amount of the invoice depends on the time taken and cost of the repair. Any unused parts are returned to the warehouse, The technician then enters the materials he used, the time the repair took, and travelling expenses (for example, taxi, hotel) in an overview sheet. This sheet is used to create an invoice for the customer.

1-1 Sales document typeCreate a sales document type ZZ## with description Service##-order.

1-1-1 Copy the reference OR standard order and use the same copying controls.

1-1-2 Prevent external number assignment.

1-1-3 Prevent the system from reading the customer-material info records.

1-1-4 Deactivate the settings for credit limit checks.

Page 330: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-5 Deactivate the checks for open quotations and contracts.

1-1-6 Set the billing block 02 No completion confirmation.

1-1-7 Deactivate the settings for payment card processing.

1-1-8 Use the current date as the requested delivery item.

1-2 Delivery and transportation schedulingDeactivate delivery and transportation scheduling for the new sales document type ZZ##.

Note: Do this in Customizing for Basic Functions.

1-3 Item: Consumable materialCheck which item category has been assigned to sales document type ZZ##.

1-3-1 Which default item category does the system determine for materials in item category group NORM?

____________________________________________________________

1-3-2 Why does this assignment already exist for the sales document type ZZ## that you created?

____________________________________________________________

1-3-3 When you enter consumable materials, the system does not run an availability check, there is no transfer of requirements and picking is not necessary. However, you do need to post goods issue in order to update inventory management. Since the delivery quantity (goods issue quantity) is the same as the order quantity, you can invoice these items using order-related billing, like service items. This means that you can invoice the customer for all the items in the sales document without any further processing.

Create a new item category, ZZ## Consumable material ## as a copy of item category TAN.

Configure the item category so that order-related billing is performed. Deactivate the Credit Management functions.

Configure the system so that it finds the new item category ZZ## for materials in item category group NORM in the service order. Do not permit any other item categories.

Note: Call up the details screen for the table entry.

Page 331: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3-4 Which schedule line category does the system find for the material in your service order that controls the MRP indicator for material T-ATO## (plant: 1200)?

What is the difference between this schedule line category and category CN?

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Change the schedule line category assignment so that the system finds schedule line category CN for consumable materials such as T-ATO## (plant: 1200).

1-3-5 Deactivate the Picking-relevant indicator for item category ZZ## in the delivery item category.

1-4 Copying control You need to configure your copying control so that you can create an order-related billing document for item category ZZ## in sales document type ZZ##. Note: go to Copying Controls for Billing Documents and choose process Sales document ZZ## → Billing document F2 and branch to item level. Copy the entry for item category TAD to item category ZZ##.

1-5 Item: ServiceConfigure your sales document type ZZ## so that item category TAD Services is automatically assigned to items with services (materials from item category group DIEN).

Do not permit any alternative item categories.

Page 332: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-6 Partner determinationIf you need a technician to carry out the repair, you need to record this information in the service order. The technician should then be informed automatically by mail when he is needed. Set up the necessary partner controls to allow this to happen.

1-6-1 Define a new partner function 8# with description PC technician ##. (Key of the new role for each student group: see the following table):Choose the suitable partner type for this function.

Keys of the new function for each student group:

Groupnumber

Partner function

Group number

Partner function

Group number

Partner function

01 8A 07 8G 13 8M

02 8B 08 8H 14 8N

03 8C 09 8I 15 8O

04 8D 10 8J 16 8P

05 8E 11 8K 17 8Q

06 8F 12 8L 18 8R

1-6-2 Define a new partner determination procedure ZZ## with description Service procedure ZZ## for sales documents and copy the following partner functions into this procedure:

– SP Sold-to party– BP Bill-to party– PY Payer– SH Ship-to party– 8# PC technician ##

Create all the partners as mandatory partners.

1-6-3 Assign procedure ZZ## to your sales document type ZZ##.

Page 333: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-7 OutputThe PC technician entered in your service order should automatically receive a mail telling him when he is needed. This output should be created when you save the sales order and appear automatically as mail in the employee's office inbox.

1-7-1 Create an output type. To do this, copying output type MAIL from the standard R/3 System with all its dependent entries.

Key: ZM## Description: Go to customer ##

1-7-2 Maintain appropriate default values for the output master records for output type ZM##.

1-7-3 Create the relevant mail data in the output type.

Document title: Service Mail ##

Mail text:You have a repair order.Customer: &VBAK-KUNNR&Order: &VBAK-VBELN&Good luck!

1-7-4 Order output type ZM## to partner function 8# (group number assignment: See exercise 1-6-1).

1-7-5 Make sure you have assigned a suitable processing program to output type ZM##.

Select output type ZM## Dialog structure: Processing routines

Program: RSNASTOForm routine: SAPOFFICE_AUFRUF_VX

1-7-6 Change the output in output determination procedure V10000 for orders at step 60 + ##. Set condition 2. Note: Level (60 + ##) means the step = Sum of 60 + your seat numberExample for group 11: 60 + 11= 71 => Maintain your entry at step 71

How does this requirement affect the output in the sales document?

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Page 334: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-7-7 Create a master record for the new output.Use the default values from the condition record.

1-7-8 When your PC technician receives the automatic mail about the customer visit, he should be able to go directly from the mail to the sales document so that he can obtain all the information he needs for the visit.

To do this, save the relevant communication data in the master record for output type ZM##:

Button: CommunicationConfirm the dialog for the dummy recipient with Yes

In line: Dummy recipient field: Activate express mail

Menu: Goto Execution parameters

Execution category: T (Execute a transaction)Execution element: VA03 (Display sales document)Activate indicator: Execute: Skip first screen

SET/GET parameters:AUN (parameter ID of field in the transaction where the document number is used)VBAK-VBELN (sales document number)Enter Back Save

1-8 Customer master record

Customer T-L63A## places an order for repairing computer equipment.

1-8-1 The PC technician brings all the materials he needs to repair the equipment with him and the journey is entered as a separate item in the order, so choose the Free house (FH) Incoterms in the customer master record.

You offer your customer the following payment conditions for service orders:– Payment within 10 days: 2%– Payment within 30 days: 1%– Payment within 50 days: No discount

1-9 Material master record: Service materialChange the item category group of your T-ATP## to DIEN (service material) in sales view 2.

Page 335: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-10 Service orderTest your settings by processing a service order in the R/3 System.

1-10-1 Enter a service order your customer T-L63A##.Customer: T-L63A##PO number: Service order ##

Can you enter a sales document number manually?

_________________________________

Why or why not?

____________________________________________________________

What are the terms of delivery for the order?

____________________________________________________________

What are the terms of payment?

____________________________________________________________

1-10-2 Enter a text item that documents the repair.

In the Description field, enter the text "PC repairs".

1.10.3 Was output type ZM## automatically found for the document?

_________________________________

Why or why not? (You can use the condition analysis for the output to see why.)

____________________________________________________________

1-10-4 Call up the incompleteness log. Assign employee Melanie Meyer with personnel number 1701## as the PC technician responsible for the order.

Note: The personnel master record for employee 1701## contains user ID Mayer-## in info category 105 "Communication".

1-10-5 Save the complete document. Check the processing status of output type ZM## in the document.

_________________________________

Page 336: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-10-6 Log on to the system with user ID Mayer-## and the password your instructor gave your for this exercise.

Call up the output, check the message and call up the document.

1-10-7 Once you have finished the repairs, you enter the service provided in the order. Your technician has installed a new monitor. Set the requested delivery date to one week from today.

Enter the service and the materials used in the repair in the relevant service order. Replace the text item in the order with the service material.

Material: T-ATP## (3 hours)Material: T-ATO## (1 unit)

How does the system respond?

____________________________________________________________

Not all the items or schedule lines in a sales document are needed in the delivery and billing documents.

Which item and schedule line categories does the system find?

Item 10: _________________________________ Item 20: _________________________________

Check in Customizing which schedule lines from the sales document generate items in the delivery document. Why?

Item 10: _________________________________ Item 20: _________________________________

1-11 Delivery

Deliver the order (shipping point: 1200). Set the selection date one week from today.

1-11-1 Which delivery item category does the system find for the consumable item?

Delivery item category: _________________________________

1-11-2 Post the goods issue. Is picking necessary?

_________________________________ Why or why not?

____________________________________________________________

Page 337: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-12 Billing document

Bill the order.

1-12-1 What message appears?

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1-12-2 Delete the billing block in the sales order.

1-12-3 Bill the order now (selection date is a week from today).Do both items due for billing appear in the billing document?

_________________________________

1-12-4 Is the data forwarded to Accounting?

_________________________________

1-12-5 Call up the document flow in the billing document view. Can you see the delivery?

_________________________________

1-12-6 Call up the document flow from the sales order view. Is the process completed as far as sales and distribution is concerned? Why?

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Page 338: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Scenario: Service Order

1-1 Sales document type

Create a sales document type ZZ## with description Service##-order.

1-1-1 Copy the reference OR standard order and use the same copying controls.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header → Define sales document types → Select sales document type OR → Button: "Copy as"

Key: ZZ## Description: Service##-orderEnter Copy to copying control: Yes Save

1-1-2 Prevent external number assignment.

No. range ext. assgt field: Blank

1-1-3 Prevent the system from reading the customer-material info records.

Read info record field: Blank

1-1-4 Deactivate the settings for credit limit checks.

Check credit limit field: BlankCredit group field: Blank

1-1-5 Deactivate the checks for open quotations and contracts.

Quotation messages field: BlankContract messages field: Blank

1-1-6 Set the billing block 02 No completion confirmation.

Billing block field: 02 Compl. confirmation missing

Page 339: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-7 Deactivate the settings for payment card processing.

Payment guarantee procedure field: BlankPayment card plan type field: BlankChecking group field: Blank

1-1-8 Use the current date as the requested delivery item.

Lead time in days field: Blank

1-2 Delivery and transportation schedulingDeactivate delivery and transportation scheduling for the new sales document type ZZ##.

Note: Do this in Customizing for Basic Functions.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Delivery Scheduling and Transportation Scheduling → Define scheduling by sales document type

DlvSchedlg field: BlankTranspSch field: Blank

1-3 Item: Consumable materialCheck which item category has been assigned to sales document type ZZ##.

1-3-1 Which default item category does the system determine for materials in item category group NORM?

TAN (as well as other alternate item categories as possible manual entries)

1-3-2 Why does this assignment already exist for the sales document type ZZ## that you created?

When you copied the sales document type OR, all of the entries for item controls were also copied for document type ZZ##.

Page 340: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3-3 When you enter consumable materials, the system does not run an availability check, there is no transfer of requirements and picking is not necessary. However, you do need to post goods issue in order to update inventory management. Since the delivery quantity (goods issue quantity) is the same as the order quantity, you can invoice these items using order-related billing, like service items. This means that you can invoice the customer for all the items in the sales document without any further processing.

Create the new item category ZZ## with description Consum. material ## by copying item category TAN.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sale Document Item → Define item categories → Select item category TAN → Choose "Copy as"

Key: ZZ##Description: Cons. material ## Enter Copy to copying control: Yes Save

Configure the item category so that order-related billing is performed. D-activate the Credit Management functions.

Relevant for billing field: B Relevant for order-related billing - Status according to order quantity

Credit active field: Blank

Configure the system so that it finds the new item category ZZ## for materials in item category group NORM in the service order. Do not permit any other item categories.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories→ Button: Position

Sales document type: ZZ## Item category group: NORMItem usage: BlankHLevItCa (higher step item category): Blank

DfItC (default item category): ZZ## (overwrite TAN)

→ Button: Details → Delete all alternate item categories

Page 341: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3-4 Which schedule line category does the system find for the material in your service order that controls the MRP indicator for material T-ATO## (plant: 1200)?

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule Lines → Assign schedule line categories

(Schedule line category: VM) Schedule line category: CV

What is the difference between schedule line category CV and category CN?

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule Lines → Define schedule line categories

Transfer of requirements and the availability check are de-activated for schedule line category CN.

Change the schedule line category assignment so that the system finds schedule line category CN for consumable materials such as T-ATO## (plant: 1200).

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule Lines → Assign schedule line categories

Entry: ZZ## VM CNAll materials that contain MRP type VM in the material master are

assigned to schedule line category CN.

Also (optional)Entry: ZS## Blank CN

All materials that do not contain an MRP type in the material master are assigned to schedule line category CN.

1-3-5 Deactivate the Picking-relevant indicator for item category ZZ## in the delivery.

IMG → Logistics Execution → Shipping → Deliveries → Define item categories for deliveries

→ Select ZS## → Choose "Details"

Relevant for picking field: Blank

Page 342: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-4 Copying control You need to configure your copying control so that you can create an order-related billing document for item category ZZ## in sales document type ZZ##.Note: go to Copying Controls for Billing Documents and choose process Sales document ZZ## → Billing document F2 and branch to item step. Copy the entry for item category TAD to item category ZZ##.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Documents→ Maintain copying control for billing documents→ Copying control: Sales document to billing document

Button: “Position”: Billing document type F2 from Sales document type ZZ##→ Select → Dialog structure: Position→ Button: Change → Select TAD → Button: Copy as→ Overwrite the “Item category” field with ZZ## Press “Enter” to confirm your changes and save.

1-5 Item: ServiceConfigure your sales document type ZZ## so that item category TAD Services is automatically assigned to items with services (materials from item category group DIEN). Do not permit any alternative item categories.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories→ Button: Position

Sales document type: ZZ## Item category group: DIENUse (item usage): BlankHLevItCa (higher step item category): BlankDfItC (default item category): TAD (overwrite TAX; no alternatives)Save

1-6 Partner determinationIf you need a technician to carry out the repair, you need to record this information in the service order. The technician should then be informed automatically by mail when he is needed. Set up the necessary partner controls to allow this to happen.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Partner Determination

Page 343: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-6-1 Define a new partner function 8# with description PC technician ##. (Key of the new role for each student group: see the following table):Choose the suitable partner type for this function.

→ Define partner functions → Choose "Partner functions"

New entry→ Function: 8# (see the following table for group number assignment)→ Description. PC technician ##→ Partner type: PE

Group number assignment: Keys of the new function for each student group:

Group number

Partner function

Group number

Partner function

Group number

Partner function

01 8A 07 8G 13 8M

02 8B 08 8H 14 8N

03 8C 09 8I 15 8O

04 8D 10 8J 16 8P

05 8E 11 8K 17 8Q

06 8F 12 8L 18 8R

Page 344: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-6-2 Define a new partner determination procedure ZZ## with description Service procedure ZZ## for sales documents and copy the following partner functions into this procedure:

– SP Sold-to party– BP Bill-to party– PY Payer– SH Ship-to party– 8# PC technician ## (Assignment of group number: See exercise 1-6-1)

→ Define and assign partner determination procedure → Select "Sales document header" → Choose "Partner procedures"

New entry:Key: ZZ##Description: Procedure ZZ##

→ Save → Button: Procedure details→ Maintain entries

Define all partners as mandatory partners.

Mandatory partner field: Select for all functionsSave

1-6-3 Assign procedure ZZ## to your sales document type ZZ##.

→ Button: Procedure assignmentChange entry: Sales document type ZZ## → Procedure ZZ##Save

Page 345: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-7 OutputThe PC technician entered in your service order should automatically receive a mail telling him when he is needed. This output should be created when you save the sales order and appear automatically as mail in the employee's office inbox.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Output Control→ Output Determination → Output determination through condition technique

1-7-1 Create an output type. To do this, copying output type MAIL from the standard R/3 System with all its dependent entries.

→ Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents→ Maintain output types → Button: Change→ Output type: Select mail → Button: Copy as

Key: ZM## Description: Customer use##Enter Copy dependent entries: Yes Save

1-7-2 Maintain appropriate default values for the output master records for output type ZM##.

→ Maintain output types → Button: ChangeDetails for output type Tab page: Default values

Transmission medium: 7 SAPOfficePartner function: 8# PC technician ## (Assignment of group number: See exercise 1-6-1)Time: 4 Send immediatelySave

1-7-3 Create the relevant mail data in the output type.

Select output type ZM## Dialog structure: Mail title and texts

Language: ENDocument title: Overwrite the mail title with: ServiceMail ##Select line Button: Text

Enter the following mail text (or change the existing text)

You have a repair order.Customer: &VBAK-KUNNR&Order: &VBAK-VBELN&Good luck!

Page 346: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Note:The variables must be bracketed with &...& and have a gray background. To accomplish this, press button: insert command to enter a variable, and enter the variable in line: Symbols, for example, &VBAK-KUNNR&. Press Enter to exit the dialog.Save

1-7-4 Assign output type ZM## to partner function 8#.

Select output type ZM## Dialog structure: Partner function

Button: New entry→ Medium: 7 (SAPOffice)→ Function: 8# (PC technician ##) (Group number assignment: See exercise 1-6-1)Press Enter to confirm your entries and Save.

1-7-5 Make sure you have assigned a suitable processing program to output type ZM##.

Select output type ZM## Dialog structure: Processing routines

Program: RSNASTOForm routine: SAPOFFICE_AUFRUF_VX

1-7-6 Change the output in output determination procedure V10000 for orders at step 60 + ##. Set condition 2. Note: Level (60 + ##) means the step = Sum of 60 + your seat numberExample for group 11: 60 + 11= 71 => Maintain your entry at step 71

→ Maintain output determination for sales documents→ Maintain output determination procedure→ Select procedure V10000 → Dialog structure: Control

→ Button: New entries: → Step: 60+##→ Counter: 1→ CType: ZM##→ Requirement: 2Save

How does this requirement affect the output in the sales document?

Requirement 2 means that output ZM## is only activated in the document when the document is complete. For example, if the PC technician has been defined as an mandatory partner, the output is only activated in the document if a valid personnel number has been assigned to partner function 8# in the sales document.

Page 347: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-7-7 Create a master record for the new output.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Output → Sales document → Create→ Output type: ZM##

→ Sales document type: ZZ##

Use the default values from the condition record.

→ Enter (default values from the master record are copied)Language: Enter EN

1-7-8 When your PC technician receives the automatic mail about the customer visit, he should be able to go directly from the mail to the sales document so that he can obtain all the information he needs for the visit.

To do this, save the relevant communication data in the master record for output type ZM##:

Button: CommunicationConfirm the dialog for the dummy recipient with Yes

In line: Dummy recipient field: Activate express mail

Menu: Goto Execution parameters

Execution category: T (Execute a transaction)Execution element: VA03 (Display sales document)Activate indicator: Execute: Skip first screen

SET/GET parameters:AUN (parameter ID of field in the transaction where the document number is used)VBAK-VBELN (sales document number)Enter Back Save

Page 348: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-8 Customer master record

Customer T-L63A## places an order for repairing computer equipment.

1-8-1 The PC technician brings all the materials he needs to repair the equipment with him and the journey is entered as a separate item in the order, so choose the Free house (FH) Incoterms in the customer master record.

→ Sales and distribution → Master data → Business partners → Customer → Change Customer: T-L63A##Sales area: 1000 10 00

Button: “Sales area data”

Tab page “Billing document”“Incoterms” field: FH

You have agreed on the following terms of payment with your customer for service orders:– Payment within 10 days: 2%– Payment within 30 days: 1%– Payment within 50 days: no discount

→ Payment terms field: 0005

1-9 Material master record: Service material

Change the item category group of your material T-ATP## to DIEN (service material) in sales view 2.

→ Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Material → Services → Change

Material: T-ATP##

Select view: Sales view 2 Org. level: Plant: Blank / Sales organization 1000 / Distribution channel: 10 Item category group: DIEN (Change entry LEIS to DIEN)

1-10 Service orderTest your settings by processing a service order in the R/3 System.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → CreateOrder type: ZZ##

Page 349: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-10-1 Enter a service order your customer T-L63A##.

Customer: T-L63A##PO number: Service order ##

Can you enter a sales document number manually?

No

Why or why not?

External number assignment field was not activated for sales document type ZZ##.

What are the terms of delivery for the order?

→ Screen: Header data – Billing document or screen: Overview - SalesIncoterms: FH

What are the terms of payment?

Payment cond.: 0005

1-10-2 Enter a text item that documents the repair.

In the Description field, enter the text "PC repairs".

1-10-3 Was output type ZM## automatically found for the document?

→ Extras → Output → Header → Edit

No (no entry)

Why or why not? (You can use the output condition analysis to determine this.)

Press the Determination analysis (i button) in the output screen

The document is still incomplete. This means that requirement 002 in the output determination procedure has not been met and output type ZM## has therefore not been processed.

1-10-4 Call up the incompleteness log. Assign employee Melanie Mayer with personnel number 1701## as the PC technician responsible for the order.

→ Back → Edit → Incompleteness log→ Button: Complete data → Enter personnel number

Note: The personnel master record for employee 1701## contains user ID Mayer-## in info category 105 "Communication".

Page 350: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-10-5 Save the complete document. Check the processing status of output type ZM## in the document.

→ Sales document → Change → Extras → Output → Edit header→ Green traffic light = successfully processed(OR → Select output → Choose "Further data")

1.10.6 Log on to the system with user ID Mayer-## and the password your instructor gave your for this exercise.

Call up the output, check the message and call up the document.

→ Output contains customer and order number → Choose "Execute" → The system displays the document.

1-10-7 Once you have finished the repairs, you enter the service provided in the order. Your technician has installed a new monitor. Set the requested delivery date to one week from today.

Enter the service and the materials used in the repair in the relevant service order. Replace the text item in the order with the service material.

Material: T-ATP## (3 hours)Material: T-ATO## (1 unit)

How does the system respond?

→ It determines a new item category for the text item.

Not all the items or schedule lines in a sales document are needed in the delivery and billing documents. Which item and schedule line categories does the system find?

Item 10: TAD / CDItem 20: ZZ## / CN

Check in Customizing which schedule lines from the sales document generate items in the delivery document. Why?

Item 10: No, the schedule line category is not relevant to deliveryItem 20: Yes, the schedule line category is relevant to delivery

Page 351: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-11 DeliveryDeliver the order (shipping point: 1200). Set the selection date one week from today.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Shipping → Delivery → Single document → CreateSelection date: One week from today

1-11-1 Which delivery item category does the system find for the consumable material?

Delivery item category: ZZ##

1-11-2 Post the goods issue. Is picking necessary?

No.

Why or why not?

Picking was deactivated for this item category.

1-12 Billing documentBill the order.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing document → Create→ Selection date: One week from today

1-12-1 What message appears?

No billing documents have been created. Log: The sales document is blocked for billing.

1-12-2 Delete the billing block in the sales order.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change

1-12-3 Bill the order now (selection date is a week from today).Do both items due for billing appear in the billing document?

Yes

1-12-4 Is the data forwarded to Accounting?

→ Logistics → Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing document → Change→ Button: Accounting

→ Yes

Page 352: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-12-5 Call up the document flow in the billing document view.Can you see the delivery?

→ Environment → Document flow→ No

1-12-6 Call up the document flow from the sales order view. Is the process completed as far as sales and distribution is concerned? Why or why not?

Yes. All the documents have overall processing status Completed. The accounting document is not cleared.

Page 353: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Course: Mini Case Study

SAP AG SAP AG 2002

SAP R/3 4.6C2002/Q3 Material Number: 5005 7289

Page 354: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Unit 1 Sales to EmployeesUnit 2 Bills of MaterialUnit 3 Material Determination

Course Content: Mini Case Study

Page 355: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Data Used in the ExercisesTo get the maximum benefit from the exercises, we recommend that you only use the data below:

Master data

Training system

Comments IDES Data

Scenario

Customer Search term

MA## MA## One-time customer 100016 Sales to employees

T-L63A## ##LO606-01 Normal customer 2006 Service order /Material determination

T-L63B## ##LO606-02 Special customer 2007 Material determination

T-L63C## ##LO606-03 Additional ship-to party: T-L63B##

2006 Material determination

T-L63D## ##LO606-04 2006 Bill of material

Material Old material no.

(Trading goods (HAWA)/ Branch: M)

T-ATM## ##LO606-01 M-11 Sales to employees

T-ATN## ##LO606-02 M-12 Sales to employees

T-ATO## ##LO606-03 M-10 Service order

T-ATP## ##LO606-04 Service material I-1000 Service order

T-ATQ## ##LO606-05 Preceding model; Availability: 02

M-15 Material determination

T-ATR## ##LO606-06 Subsequent model M-15 Material determination

T-ATS## ##LO606-07 PC main item R-1001 Bill of material

T-ATT## ##LO606-08 Component: basic equipment

R-1170 Bill of material

T-ATU## ##LO606-09 Component: processor M-13 Bill of material

T-ATV## ##LO606-10 Component: main memory

M-14 Bill of material

T-ATW## ##LO606-11 Component: monitor M-15 Bill of material

Personnel

1701## Employee 1 1701 Service order

Page 356: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Sales to Employees

Page 357: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Company employees are often able to buy goods fromtheir company at reduced prices.

In the following scenario, it is your job to create thisprocess for your company - IDES. IDES has set up itsown shop where employees can purchase the productsat reduced rates.

Sales to Employees - Business Scenario

Page 358: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

The employee takes thegoods from the shelves

and pays in cash.

The employee takesthe goods

immediately.

Invoice

Customer: MA##

1000 / 10 / 00

10 PC 1 PC

Inv. no.: 5718

The employeereceives an invoice.

The delivery iscreated automatically.

Sales to Employees - Orders

The goods offered to employees at a reduced price can be obtained from a special shop set up for employees. Employees select their goods, take them from the shelves and go to the checkout. Since employees can only buy the goods that are in the shop, an availability check and transfer of requirements are not necessary.You should not create any orders without a net value. This prevents documents without items or with free items from being created in the system.No individual customer master data for employees has been maintained in the system. Employee orders are processed using a collective master record (one-time customer account).Employees generally receive a discount of 15% off the material price. Some materials can have a higher discount.As soon as the employee has paid, they are given an invoice which serves as a receipt.The employee takes the goods away immediately.

Page 359: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Picking is not required. Goods issue is postedautomatically e.g. at the

end of each day.

Delivery

Customer: MA##

1000 10 00

10 PC 1 PC

Del. no.: 80002451

The delivery iscreated automatically.

XSales to Employees - Delivery

The system automatically creates the delivery once the sales document has been saved.Picking is not necessary, as the employees can only buy goods which are available in the shop.Goods issue can be posted manually for a single delivery, or automatically in the background at the end of each day.

Page 360: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Invoice

Customer:MA##

1000 10 00

10 PC 1PC

Inv. no.: 9005718

An invoice has already been createdand therefore does not need to be reprinted.

Invoice 9005718

Tocompany . . X

Sales to Employees - Billing Document

Because the goods are delivered as soon as the order has been saved, the order quantity is always the same as the goods issue quantity. This allows the system to create an order-related billing document.Billing documents are created automatically and collectively by running the billing list, for example, during night-time processing.In the financial accounting document, the billed amount is posted to a special cash sales account. There are no receivables for the customer.

Page 361: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Create a sales document type for sales to employees

Define a new item category for the order and delivery

Configure the important fields in the incompleteness logfor processing sales to employees

Create a customer master record for one-time customers

Extend pricing to include employees

Create an output master record for the invoice

Test sales to employees in the system

Sales to Employees - Tasks

Page 362: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Scenario: Sales to Employees

• Set up a new document type

• Define a new item category

• Set up a new customer master record

• Set up pricing controls

• Set up output controls

• Set up the incompleteness log

• Test the process

Your company produces computers. Your employees can buy in the company shop at either cost price or at discounted prices for employees. They have to pay in cash and take their purchases with them. The employee then receives an invoice for a cash sale.

Goods issue is posted and billing documents are created automatically in collective processing, for example, at the end of the day.

1-1 Sales document type

Create a sales document type for ZB## with description SE##-Sales.

1-1-1 To do this, copy the CS Cash Sales order type. Ensure that all related table entries are copied.

1-1-2 Configure the new document type such that the shipping condition is found as soon as possible (01).

1-1-3 A wide range of checks and functions can be activated in the sales document type, such as checking for open contracts or searching for customer-material info records. These checks take place in document processing and therefore affect system performance.

Ensure that all the checks and functions you don't need have been deactivated.

Page 363: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-4 Which entry prevents the user from saving incomplete documents?

____________________________________________________________

1-1-5 What affect does the entry in the Shipping conditions field have?

____________________________________________________________

1-1-6 Which entry causes a delivery to be created automatically when the sales document is saved?

____________________________________________________________

1-1-7 Which entries ensure that the current date is automatically used as the requested delivery date?

____________________________________________________________

1.1.8 What is the document type for the delivery?

____________________________________________________________

1.1.9 Make sure that the system does not propose a billing document for delivery-related transactions.

1-2 Item category in the sales and delivery documentsCreate a separate item category to enable an item control that is independent of cash sales.

1-2-1 Create a new item category ZB## by copying the item category BVN. The description for the new item category should be CS##-Item. Use the settings from the original item category.

1-2-2 Make sure that item category ZB## is automatically determined for materials with item category group NORM in sales document type ZB##.

1-2-3 Change item category ZB## for deliveries. Picking is not needed because the goods that are bought are already in the employee shop. Therefore, deactivate the Relevant for picking field for item category ZB## of the delivery.

1-3 Incompleteness Create a new incompleteness procedure at header level.

Page 364: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3-1 Copy the incompleteness procedure that controls document type CS. First determine which incompleteness procedure is used, and then copy the key entry. (Note: Dialog box: “Warning, you are not within the customer namespace”; you can press Enter to skip this message)

Key: 60+##Description: ES##-sales header(Example for determining the key for seat 20: Maintain item 80: 60 + seat no. 20 = 80 for seat 01: Maintain item 61: 60 + seat no. 01 = 61)

1-3-2 Change the new incompleteness procedure:– Remove the entry for the purchase order number.– To stop the system from creating free-of-charge documents, add the Net value of the order field.– Copy the Sales office field.

1-3-3 Assign the procedure to sales document type ZB##.

Make sure that incomplete documents cannot be saved.

1-4 Customer master recordThe employees have to be saved in the system as customers so that you can create orders for them. During project planning, it was decided that an individual customer master record is not needed for each employee. Instead, a collective master record (one-time customer account) can be used for employee sales.

1-4-1 Create a customer master record accordingly:

– Number: SE##– Company code: 1000 IDES AG– Sales area: 1000 10 00– Account group: One-time customer (CPDA)Copy template:– Customer: CPD-LO615 (sample customer) – Company code: 1000 IDES AG– Sales area: 1000 10 00

General data → Tab page: Address:– Name: Sales employee ##– Search term: ES##

Page 365: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Sales area data→ Tab page: Sales:– Sales office: 1000 Frankfurt

→ Tab page: Billing document:– Incoterms: CPT (Carriage Paid To)– Payment terms: 0001 (immediate payment due net)– Tax classification: 1

1-5 PricingYour sales manager has decided that each employee may receive a basic discount of 15%.

Maintain a condition record for a customer-specific discount.

(Condition type: K007 customer discount) in the amount of 15%.

1-6 Printing the invoiceThe system should print the invoice automatically as soon as the sales document has been saved.

1-6-1 Create an output master data record. Use output type RD03.

The output has been configured so that it is sent to the bill-to party. Set up the master record so that output is printed as soon as the document has been saved.

1-6-2 Maintain the following communication data for the output master record you just maintained:

Output device: LP01 Print immediately: activateRelease after output: activateNumber of messages: 1

Page 366: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-7 Sales to employeesTest your settings by trying to create a sale to an employee.

1-7-1 Create a sale to an employee.

Customer: MA## (enter address)

What are the terms of delivery for the order?

____________________________________________________________

What are the terms of payment?

____________________________________________________________

Can you save the document? Why or why not?

____________________________________________________________

1-7-2 Enter the following two items

Material: T-ATM## (1 unit)Material: T-ATN## (1 unit)

Which discounts were found?

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1-7-3 Which item categories did the system find for the items in the sales document?

____________________________________________________________

1-7-4 Save the order. Does the system automatically create a delivery?

____________________________________________________________

1-7-5 Check whether the system automatically printed the output when you saved the sales document.

____________________________________________________________

Display the output on your screen.

Page 367: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-7-6 What type of delivery has been created?

____________________________________________________________

Which item category does the system find for the delivery items?

____________________________________________________________

Post the goods issue.

1-7-7 Create a billing document for the transaction.

Which document does the billing document refer to?

____________________________________________________________

Where is this set in Customizing?

____________________________________________________________

What is the billing document type?

____________________________________________________________

Check the accounting document.To which accounts were the incoming payments posted?

____________________________________________________________

1-7-8 Did the system automatically determine an output in the billing document for printing the invoice? Why or why not?

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1-7-9 Look at the document flow for the whole process. Check the overall processing status of the individual documents.

Page 368: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Scenario: Sales to Employees

• Set up a new document type

• Define a new item category

• Set up a new customer master record

• Set up pricing controls

• Set up output controls

• Set up the incompleteness log

• Test the process

Your company produces computers. Your employees can buy in the company shop at either cost price or at discounted prices for employees. They have to pay in cash and take their purchases with them. The employee then receives an invoice for a cash sale.

Goods issue is posted and billing documents are created automatically in collective processing, for example, at the end of the day.

Page 369: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1 Sales document typeCreate a sales document type for ZB## with description SE##-Sales.

1-1-1 To do this, copy the CS Cash Sales order type. Ensure that all related table entries are copied.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header → Define sales document types → Select sales document type CS → Button: "Copy as"

Key: ZB## Description: ES##-sales

Press Enter to confirm your entriesDialog box (confirmation prompt): Is the entry relevant for copying control?

Confirm with Yes

Save the transaction

1-1-2 Define the new sales document type as follows:

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header→ Define sales document types

Select your new sales document type ZB## Perform the following changes and checksButton: ChangeField Shipping condition: 01 (as soon as possible)Save

1-1-3 A wide range of checks and functions can be activated in the sales document type, such as checking for open contracts or searching for customer-material info records. These checks take place in document processing and therefore affect system performance.Ensure that all the checks and functions you don't need have been deactivated.

You can deactivate the following checks:– Credit limit– Purchase order number– Commitment date– Open quotations, outline agreements and group master contracts messages– Product attribute messages – Payment cards

Page 370: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-4 Which entry prevents the user from saving incomplete documents?

The "Incomplet. messages" field is activated.

1-1-5 What affect does the entry in the Shipping conditions field have?

The shipping point is determined in the sales document from the shipping condition, the delivering plant, and the loading group of the material (see F1 Help for the field).

1-1-6 Which entry causes a delivery to be created automatically when the sales document is saved?

The Immediate delivery field is Activated by entry: X Generate delivery immediately if quantity is confirmed for today.

1-1-7 Which entries ensure that the current date is automatically used as the requested delivery date?

– The "Lead time in days" field is blank.– The "Propose deliv. Date" field is activated.

1.1.8 What is the document type for the delivery?

Information screen: Shipping: Delivery type CS

1.1.9 Make sure that the system does not propose a billing document for delivery-related transactions.

Delete the entry in field Del.-rel. bill. doc. type: CS

Page 371: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Item category in the sales and delivery documentsCreate a separate item category to enable an item control that is independent of cash sales.

1-2-1 Create a new item category ZB## by copying the item category BVN. The description for the new item category should be CS##-Item. Use the settings from the original item category.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories→ Select item category BVN → Choose "Copy as"

Key: ZB## Description: ZB##-item

Press Enter to confirm your entries

Dialog box (confirmation prompt): Is the entry relevant for copying control?

Confirm with Yes

Save the transaction

1-2-2 Make sure that item category ZB## is automatically determined for materials with item category group NORM in sales document type ZB##.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories→ Button: Position

Sales document type: ZB## Item cat. group: NORMItem usage: BlankHLevItCa (higher step item category): BlankDfItC (default item category): ZB## (overwrite BVN)

→ Button: Details → Delete all alternate item categories

Page 372: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2-3 Change item category ZB## for deliveries. Picking is not needed because the goods that are bought are already in the employee shop. Therefore, deactivate the Relevant for picking field for item category ZB## of the delivery.

IMG → Logistics Execution → Shipping → Deliveries→ Define item categories for deliveriesChoose your new Item category: ZB## Press the Details button and make the following changes → Deactivate field “Relevant for picking”

Save

1-3 Incompleteness Create a new incompleteness procedure at header level.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Incompleteness control for sales documents

1.3.1 Copy the incompleteness procedure that controls document type CS.

To determine which incompleteness procedure was used, check the corresponding assignment→ IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Incompleteness control for sales documents Assign incompleteness procedures→ Assign procedures to sales document types → Procedure 11

→ Press the Exit button to go backIMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Incompleteness control for sales documents

→ Define incompleteness procedures→ Select error group A → Press the "Procedures" button → Press the "Change" button → Select procedure 11 → Press "Copy as"

Key: 60+## Description: ES##-sales header

(Example for determining the key for seat 20: Maintain item 80: 60 + seat no. 20 = 80 for seat 01: Maintain item 61: 60 + seat no. 01 = 61)

Page 373: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Note: Dialog box: “Warning, you are not within the customer namespace”; you can press Enter to skip this message

→ Copy all entriesPress Enter to confirmDialog box (confirmation prompt): Is the entry relevant for copying control?

Confirm with Yes

Save the transaction

1-3-2 Change the new incompleteness procedure:

→ Select new procedure 60+## → Choose "Fields"

– Remove the entry for the purchase order number.→ Select the entry → Choose "Delete"

– To stop the system from creating free-of-charge documents, add the Net value of the order field.

→ Button: "New entries"

Table: VBAKField: NETWRScreen: KKONStatus: 01Warning: BlankRanking: Blank

– Copy the Sales office field.

Table: VBAKField: VKBURScreen: KKAUStatus: 01Warning: BlankRanking: Blank

Note: You can use any status group because incomplete documents cannot be saved (incompleteness control was activated in the document type SE##).

Page 374: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3-3 Assign the procedure to sales document type ZB##.

→ Exit→ Assign incompleteness procedures → Assign procedures to sales document types ZB## → Procedure 60+##

Make sure that incomplete documents cannot be saved.

→ Activate the "Incompleteness messages" field

1-4 Customer master recordThe employees have to be saved in the system as customers so that you can create orders for them. During project planning, it was decided that an individual customer master record is not needed for each employee. Instead, a collective master record (one-time customer account) can be used for employee sales.

1-4-1 Create a customer master record accordingly:

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Business partners → Customer → Create → Overall

– Account group: One-time customer (CPDA) – Number: SE##– Company code: 1000 IDES AG– Sales area: 1000 10 00

Copy template:– Customer: CPD-Lo615 (sample customer) – Company code: 1000 IDES AG– Sales area: 1000 10 00

Press Enter to start maintaining the data

General data→ Tab page “Address”:– Name: Sales employee ##– Search term: ES##

Sales area data→ Tab page “Sales”:– Sales office: 1000 Frankfurt

→ “Invoicing” screen:– Incoterms: CPT (Carriage Paid To)– Payment terms: 0001 (immediate payment due net)– Tax classification: 1

Page 375: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-5 PricingYour sales manager has decided that each employee may receive a basic discount of 15%.

Maintain a master record for customer-dependent discount (K007 customer discount) of 15%.

→ Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data→ Conditions → Select by condition type → Create Condition type: K007Button: “Key combinations” → Division/CustomerMaintain the condition recordCustomer: ES##Amount: 15Press Enter to retrieve the data from the message typeSave the condition record

1-6 Printing the invoiceThe system should print the invoice automatically as soon as the sales document has been saved.

1-6-1 Create an output master data record. Use output type RD03.

→ Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data→ Output → Sales document → Create → Enter output type RD03

The output has been configured so that it is sent to the bill-to party. Set up the master record so that output is printed as soon as the document has been saved.

Field: S. doc. type: ZB##Field: Function: PYField: Medium: BlankField: Time: 4

1-6-2 Maintain the following communication data for the output:

If you exited the transaction for maintaining the output master record, call up the output master record you just created in change mode.

Sales document type: ZB##Button: Proceed

→ Button: Communication

Printer: LP01 Print immediately: activateRelease after output: activateNumber of messages: 1

Save your entries.

Page 376: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-7 Sales to employeesTest your settings by trying to create a sale to an employee.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → CreateField: Order type: ZB##

1-7-1 Create a sale to an employee.

Customer: MA## (enter address)

→ Enter address

What are the terms of delivery for the order?

→ Tab page: Sales → CPT (from the customer master record)

What are the terms of payment?

→ Tab page: Sales → 0001 (from customer master record)

Can you save the document? Why or why not?

No. You haven't entered any items so the net value of the document is zero. Because the "Incompleteness messages" indicator was activated, you cannot save an incomplete document.

1-7-2 Enter the following two items

Material: T-ATM## (1 unit)Material: T-ATN## (1 unit)

Which discounts were found?

→ Select item 10 → Button: Conditions → K007 -15% customer discount was found

1-7-3 Which item categories did the system find for the items in the sales document?

→ Goto → Overview → Scroll to the right in the table→ Item category: ZB##

1-7-4 Save the order. Does the system automatically create a delivery?

→ Yes. Message in the status bar:SE##-Sales #### has been saved (Delivery #### created)

Page 377: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-7-5 Check whether the system automatically printed the output when you saved the sales document.

→ Display sales document → Extras → Output → Header→ green traffic light = successfully processed

Display the output on your screen.

In the sales document→ Sales document → Button: View header output

1.7.6 What type of delivery has been created?

→ Logistics → Sales and distribution → Shipping → Delivery → Change→ Single document→ Button: Header details → Tab page “Administration”: Field “Delivery type”: CS

Which item category does the system find for the delivery items?

→ Back→ Select an item and press the “Item details” button; Item category: ZB##

Post the goods issue.

→ Button: Post the goods issue

Page 378: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1.7.7 Create a billing document for the transaction.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing document → Create

Which document does the billing document refer to?

The sales document

Where is this set in Customizing?

Customizing: Sales and distribution → Sales → Sales documents → Sales document item → Define item category

In item category ZB##Field “Relevant to billing”: B

What is the billing document type?

→ See title bar of the screen Billing type: CS

Check the accounting document. To which accounts were the incoming payments posted?

→ Billing document → Change→ Environment → Display document flow→ Select accounting document→ Button: Display document→ Account number: 100 000 Petty cash

1-7-8 Did the system automatically determine an output in the billing document for printing the invoice? Why or why not?

No. As soon as the order was saved, an invoice was printed and given to the customer.

1-7-9 Look at the document flow for the whole process. Check the overall processing status of the individual documents.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Display→ Environment → Display document flow→ Select each document→ Button: Status overview

Page 379: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Bills of Material (BOMs) – Case Study

Page 380: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Several materials can often be sold together as sets orpackages. These are stored in the R/3 System as billsof material (BOMs). Each separate material in the billcan be configured individually.

Your company, IDES, specializes in combining PCpackages to meet the customer's individualrequirements. The individual components are notordered until the customer places an actual order. It isyour job to create the settings for these PC packages.

BOMs - Business Scenario

Page 381: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Order

Customer: 738Order no.: 5718Sales area: 1000 / 10 / 00

110 Basic device 1 PC120 Processor 1 PC130 RAM 4 PC140 Monitor 1 PC200 Monitor 2 PC

100 PC package 1 PC

Prices?

Purchaseorder?

Delivery note?

Availability?

Transfer ofrequirements?

BOMs - Requirements

You are a specialist in selling PCs configured according to the individual customer's requirements.The components are obtained from a distributor who is in contact with the producers in the Far East. The components are not ordered from the distributor until the customer has placed an order for the PC. This reduces warehouse stock and therefore, capital tie-up.Your customers may also order replacement parts.The components of the PC come from different vendors. Requirements are therefore transferred to purchasing at the component level. This means that one order could generate several purchase orders.An availability check in the order is not necessary because the components are ordered directly from the distributor.The delivery note must contain details of both the PC and all of its components.The invoice contains the whole package with the quantity that was delivered. All of the components should be listed in the invoice.

Page 382: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

The bill of materialis saved in the

system as a masterrecord.

Master recordMaster record

BOMBOMPC packagePC package

ComponentsComponentsBasic device 1 PCBasic device 1 PCProcessor 1 PCProcessor 1 PCRAM RAM 4 PC 4 PC.. . . . .

Order 5718Customer: 2738100 PC package 1 PC

1. Enter materialnumber with BOM

BOMs - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order 1

Page 383: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

1. Enter materialnumber with BOM

Master recordMaster record

BOM PC packageBOM BOM PC packagePC package

ComponentsBasic device 1 PCProcessor 1 PCRAM 4 PC

. . .

ComponentsComponentsBasic device 1 PCBasic device 1 PCProcessor 1 PCProcessor 1 PCRAM RAM 4 PC 4 PC

.. . . . .

BOMs - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order 2

Order 5718Customer: 2738100 PC package1 PC

2. Systemdetermines itemcategory of main

item

The bill of materialis saved in the

system as a masterrecord.

Page 384: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Master recordMaster record

BOMPC packageBOMPC package

ComponentsBasic device 1 PCProcessor 1 PCRAM 4 PC. . .

ComponentsBasic device 1 PCProcessor 1 PCRAM 4 PC. . .

MailMail

Order 5718Customer: 2738

110 Basic device 1 PC100 PC package 1 PC

BOMs - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order 3

The bill of materialis saved in the

system as a masterrecord.

1. Enter materialnumber with BOM 2. System

determines itemcategory of main

item

3. Item categoryexplodes the bill of

material

Page 385: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Master recordMaster record

BOMPC packageBOMPC package

ComponentsBasic device 1 PCProcessor 1 PCRAM 4 PC. . .

ComponentsBasic device 1 PCProcessor 1 PCRAM 4 PC. . .

MailMail

Order 5718Customer: 2738

110 Basic device1 PC100 PC package 1 PC

120 Processor 1 PC130 RAM 4 PC140 Monitor 1 PC

The material and componentsin the BOM are controlled by

the item and schedule linecategories.

BOMs - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order

The bill of materialis saved in the

system as a masterrecord.

1. Enter materialnumber with BOM 2. System

determines itemcategory of main

item

3. Item categoryexplodes the bill of

material

4. The itemcategories of the

sub-items aredetermined

If there is a bill of material master record for the material, it can be exploded in the sales document. This depends on the settings you make in Customizing.The structure is exploded in the following order in the sales document:The material that has a bill of material is entered in the order. This is the main item of the bill of material.The item category of the main item is determined. This item category controls whether and how the BOM is exploded.If the BOM should be exploded, the system does it automatically. The components are then listed in the document as sub-items for the main item.The system determines an item category for each sub-item.

You can control the functions of each item category when you define it. The schedule line categories are determined dependent on the respective item category. These settings can also be customized.

Page 386: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Create bills of material

Modify sales document type

Create your own item category groups

Create and assign your own item categories

Identify and assign suitable schedule line categories

Generate the automatic purchase requisition

Test the bills of material in the application

Bills of Material - Tasks

Page 387: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Scenario: Bills of Material in Sales and Distribution

• Create item category group

• Create sales BOM

• Create and assign item categories

• Create and assign schedule line categories

• Set up automatic purchase requisitions

• Test the process

Your company, IDES, is a trading company that specializes in selling personal computers that have been designed to meet your customer's specific requirements. You obtain the components from a distributor who is in contact with producers in the Far East. The components are not ordered from the distributor until the customer has placed an order for the PC. This reduces warehouse stock and therefore, capital tie-up.

For you to be able to order the individual components of a PC from different distributors, requirements have to be transferred to the Purchasing department at the component level. This means that one sales order could lead to several purchase orders.

However, the invoice only contains the whole package with the quantity that was delivered.

Your customers are also able to purchase individual spare parts. This means that you still have to be able to price the components individually.

The delivery note and the billing document should contain both the PC and all its relevant components.

An availability check is not necessary for the order because you procure the components directly from the distributor.

You also want to determine the cost for all components for statistics and controlling purposes.

Change the settings for a bill of material (BOM) in Sales and Distribution so that it can fulfill all these requirements.

Page 388: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1 BOMsSave a PC package in your system as a single-level bill of material by using the materials created for you in the training system.

1-1-1 Create a BOM for material T-ATS##:

Material: T-ATS##Plant: 1200 DresdenBOM usage: 5 Sales and distributionValid from: Today

Enter the following BOM items with the BOM item category L (stock item):

Item 10: T-ATT## 1 unitItem 20: T-ATU## 1 unitItem 30: T-ATV## 4 unitsItem 40: T-ATW## 1 unit

1-1-2 Check whether the items in the BOM are relevant to sales documents.

How is this achieved?

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1-1-3 Which item category groups are assigned to the materials in the BOM for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10 in the material master?

T-ATS##: _________________________________T-ATT##: _________________________________T-ATU##: _________________________________T-ATV##: _________________________________T-ATW##: _________________________________

Page 389: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Create an orderCheck your new sales and distribution BOM by creating an order in the test system.

1-2-1 Create an order for the BOM you have just created.

Document type: ZA##Sales area: 1000 10 00Customer: T-L63D##PO number: BOM## - 01

Material: T-ATS##

Does the system explode the BOM?

_________________________________

1-2-2 What item categories are automatically chosen by the system for the main and sub-items?

Main item: _________________________________Sub-items: _________________________________

1-2-3 At what level does pricing take place?

_________________________________

Where is this controlled in Customizing?

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1-2-4 Which items will appear in the billing document and why? Why or why not?

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1-2-5 Which schedule line categories does the system find for the main and sub-items?

Main item: _________________________________Sub-items: _________________________________

Page 390: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3 Sales document typeAlthough you are using Sales and Distribution BOMs in sales document type ZA##, the rest of sales processing in your company is the same as that in the R/3 Standard System. Therefore, deliveries are created for delivery type LF and billing documents with billing document type F2.

1-3-1 Check whether the correct default values have been activated in your sales document type and if necessary, change any settings.

Delivery type: _________________________________Order-related billing document type: _________________________________Delivery-related billing document type:

_________________________________

1-3-2 The items in the sales document should be numbered in 100s. When you explode a BOM, the sub-items should be numbered in 10s. Configure your sales document type accordingly.

Item no. increment: _________________________________Sub-item increment: _________________________________

1-4 Item category in the sales orderYou are using the settings already defined in Customizing for the SAP R/3 Standard System for your BOM settings. Therefore, copy the item categories from the standard system.

You want the following to take place in your BOMs:– Pricing should be calculated for the whole package.– The delivery note should contain all the items in the package.– The invoice should contain the main item and its components with the quantities that were actually delivered.– The whole BOM should be exploded in the sales document.

1-4-1 The settings that you configure in the main item are valid for the whole package.

Create a new item category ZH## with description Package##-MI by copying item category TAQ.

Name: ZH##Description: Package##-MI

Page 391: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-4-2 If necessary, change item category ZH## to meet your needs. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields.

Pricing: _________________________________Relev. for billing: _________________________________Sched. line allowed: _________________________________Determine cost: _________________________________Structure scope: _________________________________Application: _________________________________

1-4-3 The settings at the sub-item level control all of the tasks that you want to implement separately for each item. Create a new item category ZU## with description Package##-SI by copying item category TAE.

Name: ZU##Description: Package##-SI

1-4-4 If necessary, change item category ZU## so that it meets your requirements. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields.

Pricing: _________________________________Relev. for billing: _________________________________Sched. line allowed: _________________________________Determine cost: _________________________________Structure scope: _________________________________Application: _________________________________

1-4-5 If you want to sell the computer parts separately, there should be a separate item category in the sales document.Create a new item category ZN## with description PC parts## by copying TAN.

Name: ZN##Description: PC parts##

1-4-6 If necessary, change item category ZN## to meet your requirements. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, and Application fields.

Pricing: _________________________________Relev. for billing: _________________________________Sched. line allowed: _________________________________Determine cost: _________________________________Structure scope: _________________________________Application: _________________________________

Page 392: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-5 Define item category groupIn order to use the controls that have been defined for BOMs in the standard system, you decide to create a third, independent control.

1-5-1 Define the new item category group Z0## with description MTPOS Group##.

1-5-2 Change the item category group of your BOM product T-ATS## to Z0##. (Org. data: Plant: 1200 / Sales org. 1000 / DChnl: 10)

1-6 Assign item categoriesThe new item categories should be used in the sales document type ZA##.

1-6-1 Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZH## Package##-MI for the main item of the BOM.

1-6-2 Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZU## Package##-SI for the sub-items in the BOM.

1-6-3 Configure the settings so that when you sell individual computer parts, the system finds the new item category ZN## PC parts## and no other alternatives are possible.

1-7 Schedule line categoryThe components should be automatically ordered from the distributor when the sales order is saved. Two schedule line categories have been created in the training system for your group.

1-7-1 Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that a delivery item is created from the schedule line?

____________________________________________________________

1-7-2 Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that goods issue is posted to inventory management?

____________________________________________________________

Page 393: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-7-3 Schedule line category ZH with description HP-606 has been created to control the main item. Check the following fields in Customizing:

Item rel. f. dlv: _________________________________Movement type: _________________________________Transfer of requirements: _________________________________Availability check: _________________________________

1-7-4 Schedule line category ZU UP-606 has been created to control the sub-items. Check the following fields in Customizing:

Item rel. f. dlv: _________________________________Movement type: _________________________________Transfer of requirements: _________________________________Availability check: _________________________________

1-7-5 If an order is placed for a PC, you want purchase requisition creation to take place automatically for the components.

All the necessary information is contained in the schedule lines in the sales order. Important control parameters were already determined for purchase requisition creation when you defined the schedule line category in the sales order. Check the following entries in the schedule line category ZU for the sub-items in the BOM:

Purchase order type: _________________________________P.req.del.sched: _________________________________Item category: ____________________________ (purchase requisition)Acct. assigt cat.: _________________________________

1-8 Assign schedule line category1-8-1 Which MRP type was assigned to each material in the BOM for plant 1200 in

the material master record?

T-ATS##: _________________________________T-ATT##: _________________________________T-ATU##: _________________________________T-ATV##: _________________________________T-ATW##: _________________________________

1-8-2 Configure your settings so that the system finds schedule line category ZH HP-606 for the main item in the BOM.

1-8-3 Configure your settings so that the system finds schedule line category ZU purchase order for the sub-items in the BOM.

1-8-4 Configure the settings so that the system finds the schedule line category ZU purchase order for items in category ZN##.

Page 394: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-9 Item category in the deliveryBecause the PC to be delivered to the customer consists of individual components that have all been ordered, you decide that the system should pick the goods at component level.

1-9-1 Ensure that the components in the BOM have to be picked by configuring delivery item category ZU## so that it is the same as delivery item category TAN.

1-9-2 Ensure that the main item in the BOM ZH## is not picked.

1-9-3 How does delivery item category ZN## respond with regard to picking? Check and if necessary, change the settings.

1-10 Create an orderTest your BOM in a sales order.

1-10-1 Create an order.

Document type: ZA##Sales area: 1000 10 00Customer: T-L63D##PO number: BOM## - 02Req. delivery date: in two weeks

Material: T-ATS## (1 unit)

Does the system explode the bill of material?

_________________________________

1-10-2 Which item numbers does the system give the BOM?

1. Item: _________________________________2. Item: _________________________________3. Item: _________________________________4. Item: _________________________________5. Item: _________________________________

1-10-3 Does the system automatically use your item categories for the main and sub-items?

Main item: _________________________________Sub-items: _________________________________

Page 395: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-10-4 Does the system automatically use your schedule line categories?

Schedule line category for main item:____________________________Schedule line category for sub-item: ___________________________

1-10-5 Your customer adds two more monitors to the original order. Change the order and enter an item with material T-ATW##. What is the item number of this item?

Number: _________________________________

1-10-6 Which item and schedule line categories does the system use for the new item?

Item category: _________________________________Schedule line category: _________________________________

1-10-7 Did the system calculate a price for this material? Why or why not?

____________________________________________________________

1-10-8 You can call up the purchase requisition directly from the sales document and edit it there. Navigate from the order to the purchase requisition.

1-10-9 Deliver the order. Does the system explode the BOM in the delivery note?

_________________________________

Pick the delivery by creating a transfer order (warehouse number: 012).

Post the goods issue.

1-10-10 Bill the delivery. Does the system explode the BOM in the billing document?

_________________________________

Do the prices appear in the billing document?

Main item: _________________________________Sub-item: _________________________________

Page 396: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Scenario: Bills of Material in Sales and Distribution

• Create item category group

• Create sales BOM

• Create and assign item categories

• Create and assign schedule line categories

• Set up automatic purchase requisitions

• Test the process

Your company, IDES, is a trading company that specializes in selling personal computers that have been designed to meet your customer's specific requirements. You obtain the components from a distributor who is in contact with producers in the Far East. The components are not ordered from the distributor until the customer has placed an order for the PC. This reduces warehouse stock and therefore, capital tie-up.

For you to be able to order the individual components of a PC from different distributors, requirements have to be transferred to the Purchasing department at the component level. This means that one sales order could lead to several purchase orders.

However, the invoice only contains the whole package with the quantity that was delivered.

Your customers are also able to purchase individual spare parts. This means that you still have to be able to price the components individually.

The delivery note and the billing document should contain both the PC and all its relevant components.

An availability check is not necessary for the order because you procure the components directly from the distributor.

You also want to determine the cost for all components for statistics and controlling purposes.

Change the settings for a bill of material (BOM) in Sales and Distribution so that it can fulfill all these requirements.

Page 397: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1 BOMsSave a PC package in your system as a single-level bill of material by using the materials created for you in the training system.

1-1-1 Create a BOM for material T-ATS##:

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Bills of material → Bill of material → Material BOM → Create

Material: T-ATS##Plant: 1200 DresdenBOM usage: 5 Sales and distributionValid from: Today

Enter the following BOM items with the BOM item category L (stock item):

Item 10: T-ATT## 1 unitItem 20: T-ATU## 1 unitItem 30: T-ATV## 4 unitsItem 40: T-ATW## 1 unit

1-1-2 Check whether the items in the BOM are relevant to sales documents.

Bill of material → Material BOM → Change→ Select items → Goto → Item → Status/long text

How is this achieved?

The item has been set to status "relevant to sales". When you create a BOM, this status is automatically activated because the BOM has been created as a Sales and Distribution BOM. (Usage indicator: 5 Sales and distribution).

1-1-3 Which item category groups are assigned to the materials in the BOM for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10 in the material master?

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Materials → Trading goods → Display→ View: Sales: Sales Org. Data 2

T-ATS##: ERLAT-ATT##: NORMT-ATU##: NORMT-ATV##: NORMT-ATW##: NORM

1-2 Create an orderCheck your new sales and distribution BOM by creating an order in the test system.

Page 398: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2-1 Create an order for the BOM you have just created.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create

Document type: ZA##Sales area: 1000 10 00Customer: T-L63D##PO number: BOM## - 01

Material: T-ATS##

Does the system explode the BOM?

Yes

1-2-2 What item categories are automatically chosen by the system for the main and sub-items?

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change → Choose "Sales" tab page

Main item: TAQSub-items: TAE

1-2-3 At what level does pricing take place?

→ Select item → Press "Conditions"

Pricing takes place at the main item level.

Where is this controlled in Customizing?

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories→ Select TAQ/TAE → Choose "Details"

– TAQ is relevant to pricing– TAE is not relevant to pricing

Page 399: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2-4 Which items will appear in the billing document and why? Why or why not?

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories→ Select TAQ/TAE → Choose "Details"

Only the main item.Only item category TAQ is relevant to billing.

1-2-5 Which schedule line categories does the system find for the main and sub-items?

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change Select item → Button: Schedule lines for item

Main item: CNSub-items: CT

1-3 Sales document typeAlthough you are using Sales and Distribution BOMs in sales document type ZA##, the rest of sales processing in your company is the same as that in the R/3 Standard System. Therefore, deliveries are created for delivery type LF and billing documents with billing document type F2.

1-3-1 Check whether the correct default values have been activated in your sales document type and if necessary, change any settings.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header → Define sales document types→ Select ZA## → Choose "Details"

Delivery type: LFOrder-related billing document type: F2Delivery-related billing document type: F2

1-3-2 The items in the sales document should be numbered in 100s. When you explode a BOM, the sub-items should be numbered in 10s. Configure your sales document type accordingly.

Item no. increment: 100Sub-item increment: 10

Page 400: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-4 Item category in the sales orderYou are using the settings already defined in Customizing for the SAP R/3 Standard System for your BOM settings. Therefore, copy the item categories from the standard system.

You want the following to take place in your BOMs:– Pricing should be calculated for the whole package.– The delivery note should contain all the items in the package.– The invoice should contain the main item and its components with the quantities that were actually delivered.– The whole BOM should be exploded in the sales document.

1-4-1 The settings that you configure in the main item are valid for the whole package.

Create a new item category ZH## with description Package##-MI by copying item category TAQ.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories→ Select TAQ → Button: “Copy”

Name: ZH##Description: Package##-MI

1-4-2 If necessary, change item category ZH## to meet your needs. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields.

Pricing: X Standard pricingRelev. for billing: A Delivery-related billing document Schedule lines allowed: ActivatedDetermine cost: DeactivatedStructure scope: A Explode single-level bill of materialApplication: SD01 Sales and Distribution

1-4-3 The settings at the sub-item level control all of the tasks that you want to implement separately for each item.

Create a new item category ZU## with description Package##-SI by copying item category TAE.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories→ Select TAE → Button: “Copy”

Name: ZU##Description: Package##-SI

Page 401: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-4-4 If necessary, change item category ZU## so that it meets your requirements. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields.

Pricing: Blank (no pricing)Relev. for billing: A Delivery-related billing document Schedule lines allowed: ActivatedDetermine cost: ActivatedStructure scope: Blank (do not explode bill of material structure) Application: Blank

1-4-5 If you want to sell the computer parts separately, there should be a separate item category in the sales document.

Create a new item category ZN## with description PC parts## by copying TAN.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories→ Select TAN → Button: “Copy”

Name: ZN##Description: PC parts##

1-4-6 If necessary, change item category ZN## to meet your requirements. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, and Application fields.

Pricing: X Standard pricingRelev. for billing: A Delivery-related billing document Schedule lines allowed: ActivatedDetermine cost: ActivatedStructure scope: Blank (do not explode bill of material structure) Application: Blank

1-5 Define item category groupIn order to use the controls that have been defined for BOMs in the standard system, you decide to create a third, independent control.

1-5-1 Define the new item category group Z0## with description MTPOS Group##.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item category group

Page 402: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-5-2 Change the item category group of your BOM product T-ATS## to Z0##.

→ Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Materials → Trading goods → Change(Org. data: Plant: 1200 / Sales org. 1000 / DChnl: 10)View: Sales: Sales org. data 2

1-6 Assign item categoriesThe new item categories should be used in the sales document type ZA##.

1-6-1 Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZH## Package##-MI for the main item of the BOM.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories→ Button: New entries

Sales document type: ZA## Item category group: Z 0##Item usage: BlankHLevItCa (higher step item category): BlankDfItC (default item category): ZH##

1-6-2 Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZU## Package##-SI for the sub-items in the BOM.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories→ Button: New entries

Sales document type: ZA## Item category group: NORMItem usage: BlankHLevItCa (higher step item category): ZH##Default item category: ZU##

Page 403: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-6-3 Configure the settings so that when you sell individual computer parts, the system finds the new item category ZN## PC parts## and no other alternatives are possible.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories→ Button: Position

Sales document type: ZA## Item category group: NORMItem usage: BlankHLevItCa (higher step item category): BlankDfItC (default item category): ZN## (overwrite TAN)

→ Button: Details → Delete all alternate item categories

1-7 Schedule line categoryThe components should be automatically ordered from the distributor when the sales order is saved. Two schedule line categories have been created in the training system for your group.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Define schedule line categories

1-7-1 Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that a delivery item is created from the schedule line?

The "Item relevant for delivery" indicator has to be activated.

1-7-2 Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that goods issue is posted to inventory management?

The movement type

1-7-3 Schedule line category ZH with description HP-606 has been created to control the main item. Check the following fields in Customizing:

Item rel. f. dlv: activatedMovement type: blankTransfer of requirements: blankAvailability check: blank

Page 404: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-7-4 Schedule line ZU UP_606 has been created to control the lower-level items. Check the following fields in Customizing:

Item rel. f. dlv: activatedMovement type: 601Transfer of requirements: blankAvailability check: blank

1-7-5 If an order is placed for a PC, you want purchase requisition creation to take place automatically for the components.

All the necessary information is contained in the schedule lines in the sales order. Important control parameters were already determined for purchase requisition creation when you defined the schedule line category in the sales order. Check the following entries in the schedule line category ZU for the sub-items in the BOM:

Purchase order type: NBP.req.del.sched: activatedItem category: 0 Normal (in purchase requisition)Acct. assigt cat.: E Customer individual requirements

1-8 Assign schedule line category

1-8-1 Which MRP type was assigned to each material in the BOM for plant 1200 in the material master record?

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Materials → Trading goods → Display→ View: MRP 1

T-ATS##: NDT-ATT##: PDT-ATU##: PDT-ATV##: PDT-ATW##: PD

1-8-2 Configure your settings so that the system finds schedule line category ZH HP-606 for the main item in the BOM.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Define schedule line categories→ Button: Position

Item category: ZH##MRP type: NDSchedLineCat:Change to ZH

Page 405: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-8-3 Configure your settings so that the system finds schedule line category ZU purchase order for the sub-items in the BOM.

Item category: ZU##MRP type: PDSchedLineCat:Change to ZU

1-8-4 Configure the settings so that the system finds the schedule line category ZU purchase order for items in category ZN##.

Item category: ZN## MRP type: PDSchedLineCat:Change to ZU

1-9 Item category in the deliveryBecause the PC to be delivered to the customer consists of individual components that have all been ordered, you decide that the system should pick the goods at component level.

IMG → Logistics Execution → Shipping → Deliveries → Define item categories for deliveries

1-9-1 Ensure that the components in the BOM have to be picked by configuring delivery item category ZU## so that it is the same as delivery item category TAN.

→ Mat. no. 0 allowed Activate→ Check quantity 0: A Note about the situation→ Check minimum quantity: A Note about the situation→ Relevant for picking: Activate→ StLocation required: Activate→ Determine StLocation: Activate→ AutoBatchDeterm.: Deactivate

1-9-2 Ensure that the main item in the BOM ZH## is not picked.

→ Relevant for picking: Deactivate

1-9-3 How does delivery item category ZN## respond with regard to picking? Check and if necessary, change the settings.

If you sell spare parts, they have to be picked as well. Because item category ZN## was created by copying TAN, you do not need to change the settings for picking for this delivery item category.

Page 406: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-10 Create an orderTest your BOM in a sales order.

1-10-1 Create an order.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create

Document type: ZA##Sales area: 1000 10 00Customer: T-L63D##PO number: BOM## - 02Req. delivery date: in two weeks

Material: T-ATS## (1 unit)

Does the system explode the bill of material?

Yes

1-10-2 Which item numbers does the system give the BOM?

1. Item: 1002. Item: 1103. Item: 1204. Item: 1305. Item: 140

1-10-3 Does the system automatically use your item categories for the main and sub-items?

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change → Choose "Sales" tab page

Main item: ZH##Sub-items: ZU##

1-10-4 Does the system automatically use your schedule line categories?

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change Select item → Button: Schedule lines

Schedule line category for main item: ZHSchedule line category for sub-items:ZU

Page 407: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-10-5 Your customer adds two more monitors to the original order. Change the order and enter an item with material T-ATW##. What is the item number of this item?

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → ChangeMaterial: T-ATW## (2 units)

Number: 200

1-10-6 Which item and schedule line categories does the system use for the new item?

Item category: ZN## PC parts##

→ Tab page: ProcurementSchedule line category: ZU Purchase order

1-10-7 Did the system calculate a price for this material? Why or why not?

→ Select item → Button: Conditions

Yes. Item category ZN## is priced by the system.

1-10-8 You can call up the purchase requisition directly from the sales document and edit it there. Navigate from the order to the purchase requisition.

Select item → Button: Schedule lineSelect schedule line → Button: Details → Tab page: ProcurementButton: Edit

1-10-9 Deliver the order. Does the system explode the BOM in the delivery note?

Yes

Pick the delivery by creating a transfer order (warehouse number: 012).

→ Logistics → Sales and distribution → Shipping and transportation → Delivery → Change → Single document→ Follow-on function → Create transfer order

Post the goods issue.

→ Logistics → Sales and distribution → Shipping → Delivery → Change→ Button: Post the goods issue

Page 408: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-10-10 Bill the delivery. Does the system explode the BOM in the billing document?

→ Logistics → Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing document → Create

Yes

Do the prices appear in the billing document?

→ Button: Conditions

Main item: NoSub-item: Yes

Page 409: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 2002

Material Determination – Case Study

Page 410: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Materials can be automatically replaced in salesdocuments.

In the following scenario, it is your job to set upautomatic substitution for your company, IDES.

Whenever possible, the stock of the old materialshould be used up for the orders before you sell thenew product. However, you also want to deliver thenew product to certain customers.

Material Determination - Business Scenario

Page 411: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

A valid master recordfor material

determination exists.

Order

Customer: 2738

1000 10 00

10 old PC 1 PC

Order no.: 5907

You create an orderfor the old material.

Master recordMaster record

Customer: 2738Customer: 2738

Subst.: new PCSubst.: new PC

Entered: old PCEntered: old PC

Order

Customer: 2738

1000 10 00

10 new PC 1 PC

Order no.: 5907

The systemautomatically entersthe new material in

the order.

Material Determination - Order

You want to use material determination to meet the following requirements:Special customers always receive the newest model even if a purchase order is created for the old one by mistake. A warning message should inform the employee who creates the order that the material will be automatically replaced.This should also take place if the customer is also the ship-to party in the sales document.All other customers only receive the new material if they order it specifically.Once the stock of the old material has been used up, the new material can then automatically replace the old one in the sales document.

Page 412: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination - Condition Technique (6)

Sales doc. type OR

. . .

Procedure A00001

Condition type A001

Access sequence A002

Access:10 2 SlsOrg/DistCh/Ent.mat. Access:20 1 Material entered

10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .

Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 01/01/2002

Table 2 No record available

Table 1 Successful access

Entry: MAT-10Material determination master record

Valid from . . . To . . .Subst.reason: 0002

Substitution material: M-10

Order

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Material : M-10. . .

The condition technique provides more flexibility in modeling material determination and product selection.You can assign a material determination procedure to each sales document type. The procedure contains all of the Customizing information that the system needs for material determination. The procedure includes one or more defined condition typesOne access sequence (search strategy) is assigned to each condition type. Each access sequence consists of one or more accesses.Each access contains exactly one condition table. This represents the search key that the system uses to search for a valid master record.You can activate an analysis of the material determination in the sales document. The system then displays detailed information on how the materials were determined.

Page 413: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Star

tSt

art

Assigned tosales documenttype

Materialdeterminationprocedure

Condition type

Accesssequence

Access

Condition table

Materialdeterminationmaster record

!AnalyzeAnalyzeAnalyze

Material Determination - Customizing

You should configure Customizing in the reverse sequence as the system searches for the valid material determination master records for sales orders.You can activate the material determination analysis in the sales document.

Menu path: Environment -> Analysis -> Material determination -> On

You can use this function to check Customizing in detail and carry out a step-by-step search of the system. This helps you to recognize and correct any incorrect settings quickly and easily.

Note: The analysis runs during material determination so it must be activated before you enter the items in the document.

Page 414: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Should the materialbe re-determinedwhen you create

the delivery?Order

Customer: 2738

1000 10 00

10 new PC 1 PC

Order no.: 5907

Delivery

Customer: 2738

1000 10 00

10 new PC 1 PC

Order no.: 5907

?Order confirmation

Old PC 1 PC

Which materialappears in the order

confirmation?

Material Determination - Substitution Reason

If the system automatically replaces the old material because it is no longer available (= automatic product selection), you can re-execute substitution when you create a delivery. This is useful if the amount of available material changes between creating the order and the delivery.Depending on your settings in Customizing, the order confirmation can contain either the material that was ordered or the substitution material.

Page 415: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

SAP AG 1999

Create a new material master record

Create a new condition table

Set up a new access sequence

Set up a new condition type for material determination

Set up a new procedure for material determination

Create a new reason for substitution

Create master records for material determination

Test the effect of material determination in the order,delivery and order confirmation

Material Determination - Tasks

Page 416: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Scenario: Material Determination

• Build and execute condition technique in material determination

• Define and assign material determination procedure

• Define material determination type

• Define access sequences

• Define and assign condition tables

• Create master records

• Test the process

Your company IDES sells computers and computer parts. You recently added new products to your stock.

It is your job to configure the sales and distribution model so that special customers always receive a “new” product when they order the “old” one. All other customers should continue to receive the old product until stocks run out.

Up until now, you have been using material determination with the standard Customizing settings that were delivered in your R/3 System. In this exercise, you will change material determination to meet your new requirements.

Page 417: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1 Material master record: Your monitor T-ATQ## is one of the most successful trading goods in the engineering industry and therefore, your company is constantly updating it.

1-1-1 Create a material master record for the new product T-ATR##. Use the previous model T-ATQ## as a reference. Maintain the following views:

– Basic data 1 and 2 – MRP 1-4– Sales 1 and 2 – Forecasting– Sales: General/Plant data – General plant data/Storage 1 and 2– Sales text – Accounting 1 and 2

Create the material in the following organizational units:

Plant: 1200 Sales organization: 1000Storage location: 0001 Distr. channel: 10

Note: Make sure that you complete both the organizational levels and copy from fields with the information above. Use the same organization units for your copy. Copy the data from the previous model and add or change the following fields:

– Basic data 1:Material description: NewScreen ##Net weight: 15 kgGross weight: 16 kg

– Sales 2:Pricing ref. material: M-15

– MRP 2:Prod. stor. location: 0001

– Accounting 1:Standard price: 1600

1-1-2 Post 1000 units to the unrestricted-use stock (movement type: 561, plant: 1200, storage location: 0001).

Page 418: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2 Condition table In the condition table, you define the fields in the sales document whose data the SAP system should use to find a valid master record for material determination.

1-2-1 Create the new condition table 6## so that you can use it for creating master records for material determination. The new condition table should allow you to create master records that are only effective for certain customers and materials. You want to be able to restrict the validity of the master records. Use condition table 002 as a reference.

Condition table: 6##Description: Customer / Material ##

Note: Make sure that the material you want to enter appears as the last key field in the condition table. This means that the system checks the header fields first (for example, customer) and then the item fields in the condition table, which improves system performance.

1-2-2 When you set up the condition table, you can determine what the screen for processing master records in the new condition table looks like.

For efficient maintenance of master records, you should be able to process the customer and material numbers in separate lines.

1-2-3 Generate the new condition table.

Note: Create the new object in the Data Dictionary for development class $TMP. It is then a local object and cannot be transported.

1-2-4 What information do you receive in the log?

1-3 Access sequenceThe access sequence is the strategy used by the system to search for valid master records for a particular condition type. The access sequence contains one or more search steps (= accesses). Each access contains a condition table which determines the key fields for the search. These are the document fields that the system uses to search for valid master records.

Define a new access sequence containing three steps that the system can use to search for master records in material determination:

1. Was a master record stored for the material and the sold-to party?2. Was a master record stored for the material and the ship-to party?3. Was a master record stored for the material that substitutes the material depending on availability?

Page 419: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3-1 Define the new access sequence.

AcSq (access sequence): Y0##Name: Search strategy ##

1-3-2 The material should be substituted in the first access (no. 10 in the sequence) if there is a valid master record for the customer (field KUNNR: KUNAG) and the entered material.

1-3-3 Branch to the fields in the condition table entered and look at the settings.

Note: No condition is required. You can therefore skip the warning regarding the field assignment by pressing Enter. Which field in the sales document does the system use to determine the customer number?

_________________________________

1-3-4 Substitution should take place in the second access (no. 20 in the sequence) if there is a valid master record for the ship-to party (field: KUNNR: KUNWE) and material entered. Configure the access.

1-3-5 In the third access (no.20 in the sequence), the system should only search for valid master records in material determination using the material entered. This is the standard setting in the R/3 System. Check the fields in the access.

1-3-6 Save the new access sequence. To do this, create a new transfer order

Short description: Access sequence group ##

1-4 Condition type for material determinationYou can use different search strategies to model material determination. You have to configure a separate condition type for each search strategy that you use in the business process.

1-4-1 Create a new condition type with the access sequence that you have just defined.

Condition type: Y0##Name: Condition type ##

1-4-2 Customize the condition type so that when you create a master record, the system automatically proposes a validity period from today to the end of the year.

Page 420: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-5 Material determination procedureAll the tasks that are undertaken in the business process for material determination are anchored in a procedure for material determination. The material determination procedure contains one or more condition types and each condition type can refer to its own access sequence.

Define a new procedure.

Material determination procedure: Y000##Description: Group procedure ##

1-5-1 Copy the condition type you defined earlier into the procedure.

Step: 10Cntr (counter): BlankCondition type: Y0##

1-5-2 Assign the new determination procedure to sales document type ZA##.

1-6 Create a reason for substitutionCreate reason for substitution Z## with short text Substitution ## for material determination. Define the following properties (or change your reason for substitution Z## if you already created it in the Material Substitution unit):

– The order confirmation should contain the material ordered by the customer. – The system should issue a warning message before it substitutes a material.– Substitution should take place automatically (i.e. without a selection screen).– The system should not generate any lower-level items in the document when it substitutes a material.

1-7 Create master recordsCreate a master record for material determination.

1-7-1 T-L63B## is one of your special customers. Ensure that this customer always receives the new material in future orders, even if the sales order department enters an order for the old material by mistake. Use your substitution reason.

1-7-2 Ensure that this customer also always receives the new material in future orders when he or she is entered as the ship-to party in a sales process and an order is created with the old material. Use your substitution reason.

Page 421: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-7-3 Enter another master record in which you ensure that material T-ATR## automatically replaces material T-ATQ## once the latter is no longer available. This should take place for all orders for material T-ATQ## regardless of the ordering party.

The material should only be substituted in the sales document. The subsequent delivery document should copy the details from the sales order. Choose a relevant substitution reason.

Note: The master record must contain the materials to be substituted, T-ATQ## and T-ATR##, in the correct sequence.

1-8 Create outputCreate a master record for output type BA00 Order confirmation for document type ZA##.

Output type: BA00Sales document type: ZA##

Copy the default values from the output type by pressing Enter.

Maintain printer LP01 as the output device and set the number of messages to 1.

1-9 Create an orderTest your settings for material determination in the sales document.

1-9-1 According to the master record you have created for material determination, customer T-L63B## should always receive the new product T-ATR##. Create a standard order for customer T-L63B## and the old product T-ATQ## (10 units) (purchaser order number: MatDeter##01).

Did the system substitute the material?

_________________________________

Why or why not?

____________________________________________________________

Page 422: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-9-2 Create the same order for sales document type ZA## (purchase order number: MatDeter##02).

Did the system substitute the material?

_________________________________

Check the substitution reason in the sales document.

Substitution reason: _________________________________

Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which material is displayed in the printout?

Material: _________________________________

Why or why not?

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1-9-3 T-L63B## is also the ship-to party for your customer T-L63C##. Create an order for ship-to party T-L63B##.

Ship-to party: T-L63B##Sold-to party: T-L63C##Purchase order no: MatDeter##03

Activate the material determination analysis (before entering the item).

Material: T-ATQ## (10 units)

Did the system substitute the material for the ship-to party?

_________________________________

Did the system display a warning message for the substitution?

_________________________________

Use the analysis to check your Customizing settings for material determination.

Use the analysis to check which date the system uses in the document to check the validity date of the master record.

_________________________________

Page 423: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-9-4 Enter another order for sales document type ZA## for a “regular” customer.

Customer: T-L63A##PO number: MatDeter##04

Material: T-ATQ## (10 units)

Check the substitution reason in the sales document.

Substitution reason: _________________________________

Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which materials are displayed in the printout?

Material: _________________________________Material: _________________________________

Why or why not?

____________________________________________________________

1-9-5 Check the available stock for material T-ATQ##.

Stock: _________________________________

Change the last order and enter a new item with a quantity that exceeds the available quantity.

Which materials and quantity does the system automatically use when substituting this material?

Material: _________________________________Material: _________________________________

Check the order confirmation on the screen. Does the system display both substituted materials?

_________________________________

1-9-6 Post 50 units of material T-ATQ## to stock. (Plant: 1200; storage location: 0001; movement type: 561).

Deliver the last order. Compare the quantities in the order and the delivery. Are there any differences? Why or why not?

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Page 424: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Solutions

Scenario: Material Determination

• Build and execute condition technique in material determination

• Define and assign material determination procedure

• Define material determination type

• Define access sequences

• Define and assign condition tables

• Create master records

• Test the process

Your company IDES sells computers and computer parts. You recently added new products to your stock.

It is your job to configure the sales and distribution model so that special customers always receive a “new” product when they order the “old” one. All other customers should continue to receive the old product until stocks run out.

Up until now, you have been using material determination with the standard Customizing settings that were delivered in your R/3 System. In this exercise, you will change material determination to meet your new requirements.

Page 425: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1 Material master record: Your monitor T-ATQ## is one of the most successful trading goods in the engineering industry and therefore, your company is constantly updating it.

1-1-1 Create a material master record for the new product T-ATR##. Use the previous model T-ATQ## as a reference. Maintain the following views:

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Material → Trading goods → Create → Industry sector: Engineering

– Basic data 1 and 2 – MRP 1-4– Sales 1 and 2 – Forecasting– Sales: General/Plant data – General plant data/Storage 1 and 2– Sales text – Accounting 1 and 2

Create the material in the following organizational units:

Plant: 1200 Sales organization: 1000Storage location: 0001 Distr. channel: 10

Note: Make sure that you complete both the organizational levels and copy from fields with the information above. Use the same organization units for your copy. Copy the data from the previous model and add or change the following fields:

– Basic data 1:Material description: NewScreen ##Net weight: 15 kgGross weight: 16 kg

– Sales 2:Pricing ref. material: M-15

– MRP 2:Prod. stor. location: 0001

– Accounting 1:Standard price: 1600

Page 426: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-1-2 Post 1000 units to the unrestricted-use stock (movement type: 561, plant: 1200, storage location: 0001).

Logistics → Materials management → Inventory managementGoods movement → Goods receipt → Other

Movement type: 561Plant: 1200Storage location: 0001

Enter

Material: T-ATR##Quantity: 1000Save

1-2 Condition table In the condition table, you define the fields in the sales document whose data the SAP system should use to find a valid master record for material determination.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Material Determination

1-2-1 Create the new condition table 6## so that you can use it for creating master records for material determination. The new condition table should allow you to create master records that are only effective for certain customers and materials. You want to be able to restrict the validity of the master records. Use condition table 002 as a reference.

→ Maintain prerequisites for material determination → Create condition tables

Condition table: 6##Description: Customer / Material ##(Note: To change the description, press button: Propose/maintain text)

→ Delete the “Sales organization” and “Distribution channel” fieldsby positioning the cursor on the entry and pressing button: “Delete line” to delete the entry

→ Insert field,Position the cursor on the first line in the area of selected fields and press the “Insert line” button

→ Add “Customer” fieldPosition the cursor on the “Customer” field and press the “Select field” button

Note: Make sure that the material you want to enter appears as the last key field in the condition table. This means that the system checks the header fields first (for example, customer) and then the item fields in the condition table, which improves system performance.

Page 427: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-2-2 When you set up the condition table, you can determine what the screen for processing master records in the new condition table looks like.

For efficient maintenance of master records, you should be able to process the customer and material numbers in separate lines.

→ Button: Technical view→ Set the “Line field” indicator for the new “Customer” key field

1-2-3 Generate the new condition table.

Note: Create the new object in the Data Dictionary for development class $TMP. It is then a local object and cannot be transported.

→ Button: Generate→ Development class: $TMP→ Button: Local object

1-2-4 What information do you receive in the log?

The log indicates that the new table was activated and that the condition record screens are ready to be generated. The system does not generate the screens for entering condition records immediately but when you create a master record with the new key combination (= condition table) for the first time.

1-3 Access sequenceThe access sequence is the strategy used by the system to search for valid master records for a particular condition type. The access sequence contains one or more search steps (= accesses). Each access contains a condition table which determines the key fields for the search. These are the document fields that the system uses to search for valid master records.

Define a new access sequence containing three steps that the system can use to search for master records in material determination:

1. Was a master record stored for the material and the sold-to party?2. Was a master record stored for the material and the ship-to party?3. Was a master record stored for the material that substitutes the material depending on availability?

1-3-1 Define the new access sequence.

→ Maintain the requirements for material determination→ Maintain access sequences → Button: New entries

Access sequence: Y0##Name: Search strategy ##

Page 428: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3-2 The material should be substituted in the first access if there is a valid master record for the customer and the entered material.

→ AcSq (access sequence): Select Y0## → Choose "Accesses"→ Choose "New entries"→ AcNo field: 10→ Tab. field: 6##

1-3-3 Branch to the fields in the condition table entered and look at the settings.

→ Select access 10 → Dialog structure: Fields

Note: No condition is required. You can therefore skip the warning regarding the field assignment by pressing Enter.

Which field in the sales document does the system use to determine the customer number?

The system checks the KUNNR field. In the order, this is the field with the sold-to party's customer number (KUNAG).Save

1-3-4 Substitution should take place in the second access if there is a valid master record for the ship-to party and entered material. Configure the access.

→ Dialog structure:: Accesses→ AcNo field: 20→ Tab. field: 6##→ Select access 20 → Dialog structure: Fields→ Position cursor in column: Document field on field: KUNNR → Button: Field catalog→ Select field "Ship-to party" (KUNWE)Skip the warning and Save your entry

1-3-5 In the third step, the system should only search for valid master records in material determination using the material entered. This is the standard setting in the R/3 System. Check the fields in the access.

→ Dialog structure:: Accesses (→ Button: “New entries”)→ AcNo field: 30→ Tab. field: 001→ Select access 30 → Dialog structure: FieldsSkip the warning and save your entry .

Page 429: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-3-6 Save the new access sequence. To do this, create a new transfer order

→ Save → Button: “Create order”

Short text: Access sequence group ##

→ Assign request number to your change request by pressing "Enter".

1-4 Condition type for material determinationYou can use different search strategies to model material determination. You have to configure a separate condition type for each search strategy that you use in the business process.

1-4-1 Create a new condition type with the access sequence that you have just defined.

→ Maintain the requirements for material determination→ Define type of material determination → Button: “New entries”

Condition type: Y0##Name: Condition type ##

Access sequence: Y0##

1-4-2 Customize the condition type so that when you create a master record, the system automatically proposes a validity period from today to the end of the year.

Valid from: blankValid to: 2

Save the condition type.

1-5 Material determination procedureAll the tasks that are undertaken in the business process for material determination are anchored in a procedure for material determination. The material determination procedure contains one or more condition types and each condition type can refer to its own access sequence.

Define a new procedure.

→ Maintain the requirements for material determination→ Maintain procedure → Button: “New entries”

Material determination procedure: Y000##Description: Group procedure ##

Page 430: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-5-1 Copy the condition type you defined earlier into the procedure.

→ Button: Control → Button: “New entries”

Level: 10Cntr (counter): BlankCondition type: Y0##

Save the procedure.

1-5-2 Assign the new determination procedure to sales document type ZA##.

→ Assign material determination to sales document types→ Select entry ZA## → Enter procedure Y000##

Save the assignment.

1-6 Create a reason for substitutionCreate reason for substitution Z## with short text Substitution ## for material determination. Define the following properties (or change your reason for substitution Z## if you already created it in the Material Substitution unit) :→ Define reasons for substitution → Button: “New entries”

Sub. reason: Z##Description: Substitution ##

– The order confirmation should contain the material ordered by the customer. – The system should issue a warning message before it substitutes a material.– Substitution should take place automatically (i.e. without a selection screen).– The system should not generate any lower-level items in the document when it substitutes a material.

Entry field: activateWarning field: activateStrategy field: blankOutcome field: blankCategory field: blank

Save the reason for substitution.

Page 431: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-7 Create master recordsCreate a master record for material determination.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Material determination → Create

1-7-1 T-L63B## is one of your special customers. Ensure that this customer always receives the new material in future orders, even if the sales order department enters an order for the old material by mistake. Use your substitution reason.

Material determin. type: Y0##→ Choose "Key combination"→ Select "Customer/Material ##"

Customer: T-L63B##Ent. mat.: T-ATQ##Material: T-ATR##Reason: Z##

Save the master record.

1-7-2 Ensure that this customer also always receives the new material in future orders even when he or she is entered as the ship-to party in a sales process and an order is created with the old material. Use your substitution reason.

This is already ensured by the first master record together with access 20.

1-7-3 Enter another master record in which you ensure that material T-ATR## automatically replaces material T-ATQ## once the latter is no longer available. This should take place for all orders for material T-ATQ## regardless of the ordering party.

The material should only be substituted in the sales document. The subsequent delivery document should copy the details from the sales order. Choose a relevant substitution reason.

Note: The master record must contain the materials to be substituted, T-ATQ## and T-ATR##, in the correct sequence.

Material determin. type: Z0##→ Button: Key combination → Entered material

Ent. mat: T-ATQ##Material: T-ATQ## (T-ATQ## should be delivered first)Reason: 0006

→ Select entry → Button: “Alternate materials”Material: T-ATR## (is used if T-ATQ## is not available)

Save the master record.

Page 432: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-8 Create outputCreate a master record for output type BA00 Order confirmation for document type ZA##.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Output → Sales document → Create

Output type: BA00Sales document type: ZA##

Copy the default values from the output type by choosing Enter.

→ Button: “Communication”

Maintain printer LP01 as the output device and set the number of messages to 1.

Save the master record.

1-9 Create an orderTest your settings for material determination in the sales document.

1-9-1 According to the master record you have created for material determination, customer T-L63B## should always receive the new product T-ATR##. Create a standard order for customer T-L63B## and the old product T-ATQ## (10 units) (purchaser order number: MatDeter##01).

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create

Did the system substitute the material?

No

Why or why not?

The material determination procedure has been assigned to order type ZA## and not the standard order.

Page 433: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-9-2 Create the same order for sales document type ZA## (purchase order number: MatDeter##02).

Did the system substitute the material?

Yes

Check the substitution reason in the sales document.

→ Item → Details: Sales

Reason for substitution: Z##

Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which material is displayed in the printout?

Button: Header output in menubar

Material: T-ATQ##

Why?

The "Entered" key had been activated for substitution reason Z## which controls that the material entered in the order is printed out in the order confirmation.

Page 434: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-9-3 T-L63B## is also the ship-to party for your customer T-L63C##. Create an order for ship-to party T-L63B##.

Ship-to party: T-L63B##Sold-to party: T-L63C##Purchase order no: MatDeter##03

Activate the material determination analysis (before entering the item).

Environment → Analysis → Material determination → On

Material: T-ATQ## (10 units)

Did the system substitute the material for the ship-to party?

Yes

Did the system display a warning message for the substitution?

Yes

Use the analysis to check your Customizing settings for material determination.

Double-click on an access in the left half of the screen → Information about this access is displayed in the right half of the screen.

Use the analysis to check which date the system uses in the document to check the validity date of the master record.

Requested delivery date1-9-4 Enter another order for sales document type ZA## for a “regular” customer.

Customer: T-L63A##PO number: MatDeter##04

Material: T-ATQ## (10 units)

Check the substitution reason in the sales document.

Substitution reason: 0006

Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which materials are displayed in the printout?

Material: T-ATQ##Material: T-ATQ##

Why?

The order can be met using T-ATQ## so it is the only material delivered.

Page 435: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

1-9-5 Check the available stock for material T-ATQ##.

→ Select the second item → Environment → Availability

Stock: _________________________________

Change the last order and enter a new item with a quantity that exceeds the available quantity.

Which materials and quantity does the system automatically use when substituting this material?

Material: T-ATQ##Material: T-ATR##

Check the order confirmation on the screen. Does the system display both substituted materials?

Yes

1-9-6 Post 50 units of material T-ATQ## to stock. (Plant: 1200; storage location: 0001; movement type: 561).

Logistics → Materials management → Inventory managementGoods movement → Goods receipt → Other

Movement type: 561Plant: 1200Storage location: 0001

Now deliver the last order. Compare the quantities in the order and the delivery. Are there any differences?

No

Why or why not?

Because of substitution reason 0006: The system only substitutes the material in the order and not in the delivery.

Page 436: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

2

SAP AG 2002

Course: Certification

SAP AG 2002

Page 437: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Exercises

Sample Certification Questions about the content of TSCM60 Order Fulfillment I

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will have an overview

- about the concept of the certification questions

Page 438: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Topic: Order ProcessingQuestion 1Which of these statements apply when creating sales orders?

1. Answer 1: Every order is clearly assigned to a sales area.

2. Answer 2: During order entry you can also work with the individual material numbers from the ordering party.

3. Answer 3: Data, which is determined automatically during order entry from the customer or material master record cannot be changed manually.

4. Answer 4: Data at header level always applies to all items.

5. Answer 5: A delivery block can only be set at item level.

Answer 1: CorrectAnswer 2: CorrectAnswer 3: IncorrectAnswer 4: IncorrectAnswer 5: Incorrect

Page 439: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Topic: IncompletionQuestion 1What is in the incompletion procedure and where is it assigned?

6. Answer 1: The incompletion procedure contains a list of fields for orders, deliveries and billing documents. To be able to save the document, you must complete these fields.

7. Answer 2: The incompletion procedure specifies the effect that incomplete data in the sales documents will have on further processing.

8. Answer 3: The incompletion procedure allows you to control whether incomplete sales documents can be saved, for each sales document category.

9. Answer 4: Incompletion procedures can be set up and assigned at sales document category, item category or schedule line category level.

10. Answer 5: Partner functions, texts and condition types in Pricing cannot be included in the incompletion procedure.

Answer 1: IncorrectAnswer 2: CorrectAnswer 3: CorrectAnswer 4: CorrectAnswer 5: Incorrect

Page 440: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Topic: PricingQuestion 1Which of these statements about the pricing procedure are correct?

11. Answer 1: The pricing procedure defines all condition types that are possible in a sales document.

12. Answer 2: The pricing procedure defines the sequence in which the conditions are set in the business document.

13. Answer 3: The conditions in the pricing screen of the customer order can always be changed manually.

14. Answer 4: The pricing procedure allows conditions to be put together to make subtotals.

15. Answer 5: If conditions from the pricing procedure do not appear in the sales document, they must be indicated accordingly.

Answer 1: CorrectAnswer 2: CorrectAnswer 3: IncorrectAnswer 4: CorrectAnswer 5: Incorrect

Page 441: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Topic: Material DeterminationQuestion 1Which of the following statements on material determination are correct?

16. Answer 1: Using material determination, a material entered during sales order entry can be replaced by a replacement material.

17. Answer 2: The material number for the material being replaced requires a material master record.

18. Answer 3: Manual as well as automatic product selection depends on the availability situation.

19. Answer 4: In product selection condition records can only be created which are dependent on the material number.

20. Answer 5: During processing of material determination condition records, you can define the validity period.

Answer 1: CorrectAnswer 2: IncorrectAnswer 3: IncorrectAnswer 4: IncorrectAnswer 5: Correct

Page 442: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Topic: SalesQuestion 1 (4vk100 E)How is the schedule line determined?

21. Answer 1:Item category and document type

22. Answer 2:Item category group and strategy group on the material master record

23. Answer 3:Item category and MRP type on the material master record

24. Answer 4:MRP Type and shipping point

Answer 1: IncorrectAnswer 2: IncorrectAnswer 3: CorrectAnswer 4: Incorrect

Page 443: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Topic: Availability CheckQuestion 1 (4vp002 E)Which of the following statements about rescheduling sales documents are correct?

25. Answer 1: IncorrectDuring rescheduling all sales orders are rechecked for availability only along the principle of "first in - first out".

26. Answer 2: CorrectDuring rescheduling, all open sales document items that come up in the item index for materials can be rechecked for availability.

27. Answer 3: CorrectCertain sales order items can be excluded from rescheduling with an indicator in the schedule line.

28. Answer 4: IncorrectFor performance reasons, rescheduling is only possible as a batch job.

Answer 1: IncorrectAnswer 2: CorrectAnswer 3: CorrectAnswer 4: Incorrect

Page 444: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Question 2Which of these statements on the availability check are correct?

29. Answer 1: The indicator for controlling complete/partial deliveries is set from the customer master record . It can not be manually changed during sales order entry.

30. Answer 2: The availability check is always carried out in the order.

31. Answer 3: In each case the replenishment lead time is taken into account.

32. Answer 4: Inward and outward movements in the stock are taken into account in the availability check.

33. Answer 5: The indicator used for processing complete and partial deliveries can be changed manually in sales order entry.

Answer 1: IncorrectAnswer 2: IncorrectAnswer 3: IncorrectAnswer 4: CorrectAnswer 5: Correct

Page 445: TSCM60 - Mighty Networks · 2018-12-16 · SAP AG 1999 Main Business Scenario The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers. To process the business

Topic: Special Business TransactionsQuestion 1 (4bb005 E)Which of these statements on consignment are correct?

34. Answer 1: Consignment fill-up sends goods to customer’s non-valuated stock.

35. Answer 2: Consignment fill-up creates a special stock for the customer, after posting goods issue.

36. Answer 3: After goods issue the goods remain in the delivering plant’s valuated stock for consignment fill-up.

37. Answer 4: In the standard configuration for a Consignment issue, the billing document is automatically posted to accounting

Answer 1: IncorrectAnswer 2: CorrectAnswer 3: CorrectAnswer 4: Incorrect